Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration

Transcription

Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
V100R006C00
Configuration Guide - Basic
Configuration
Issue
01
Date
2011-07-15
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address:
Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
[email protected]
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
About This Document
About This Document
Intended Audience
This document provides the basic concepts, basic configuration procedures, and configuration
examples supported by the S5700.
This document is intended for:
l
Data configuration engineers
l
Commissioning engineers
l
Network monitoring engineers
l
System maintenance engineers
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol
Description
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which
if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
NOTE
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points of the main text.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
About This Document
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic
Command arguments are in italics.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by
vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }*
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]*
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by
vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
&<1-n>
The parameter before the & sign can be repeated 1 to n times.
#
A line starting with the # sign is comments.
Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.
Changes in Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Initial commercial release.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Logging In to Switch.....................................................................................................................1
1.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................................2
1.1.1 Login Through the Console.......................................................................................................................2
1.1.2 Login Through Telnet................................................................................................................................2
1.2 Logging In to the Device Through the Console Port..........................................................................................2
1.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.........................................................................................................3
1.2.2 Establishing the Physical Connection........................................................................................................3
1.2.3 Configuring Terminals..............................................................................................................................4
1.2.4 Logging In to the Device...........................................................................................................................4
1.3 Logging In to Device Through Telnet................................................................................................................4
1.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.........................................................................................................5
1.3.2 Establishing the Physical Connection........................................................................................................5
1.3.3 Configuring Login User Parameters..........................................................................................................6
1.3.4 Logging In from the Telnet Client.............................................................................................................6
1.4 Configuration Examples.....................................................................................................................................6
1.4.1 Example for Logging In Through the Console Port..................................................................................6
1.4.2 Example for Logging In Through Telnet..................................................................................................9
2 CLI Overview...............................................................................................................................11
2.1 CLI Introduction...............................................................................................................................................12
2.1.1 Command Line Interface.........................................................................................................................12
2.1.2 Command Levels.....................................................................................................................................12
2.1.3 Command Views.....................................................................................................................................13
2.2 Online Help.......................................................................................................................................................15
2.2.1 Full Help..................................................................................................................................................15
2.2.2 Partial Help..............................................................................................................................................16
2.2.3 Error Messages of the Command Line Interface.....................................................................................16
2.3 Features of Command Line Interface...............................................................................................................17
2.3.1 Editing.....................................................................................................................................................17
2.3.2 Displaying................................................................................................................................................18
2.3.3 Regular Expressions................................................................................................................................18
2.3.4 History Commands..................................................................................................................................22
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
Contents
2.4 Shortcut Keys...................................................................................................................................................22
2.4.1 System Shortcut Keys..............................................................................................................................22
2.5 Configuration Examples...................................................................................................................................23
2.5.1 Example for Using the Tab Key..............................................................................................................24
3 How to Use Interfaces.................................................................................................................25
3.1 Introduction to Interfaces..................................................................................................................................26
3.2 Setting Basic Parameters of an Interface..........................................................................................................28
3.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................29
3.2.2 Entering the Interface View.....................................................................................................................29
3.2.3 Viewing All the Commands in the Interface View.................................................................................30
3.2.4 Configuring the Description for an Interface...........................................................................................30
3.2.5 Starting and Shutting Down an Interface................................................................................................30
3.2.6 Further Configuration an Interface..........................................................................................................31
3.2.7 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................32
3.3 Configuring the Loopback Interface.................................................................................................................32
3.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................32
3.3.2 Configuring IPv4 Parameters of the Loopback Interface........................................................................33
3.3.3 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................33
3.4 Maintaining the Interface..................................................................................................................................34
3.4.1 Clearing Statistics Information on the Interface......................................................................................34
3.4.2 Debugging the Interface..........................................................................................................................34
4 Basic Configuration.....................................................................................................................35
4.1 Basic Configuration Introduction.....................................................................................................................36
4.2 Configuring the Basic System Environment....................................................................................................36
4.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................36
4.2.2 Configuring the Equipment Name...........................................................................................................37
4.2.3 Setting the System Clock.........................................................................................................................37
4.2.4 Configuring a Header..............................................................................................................................38
4.2.5 Configuring Command Levels................................................................................................................39
4.3 Configuring Basic User Environment..............................................................................................................40
4.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................40
4.3.2 Configuring the Password for Switching User Levels............................................................................40
4.3.3 Switching User Levels.............................................................................................................................41
4.3.4 Locking User Interfaces...........................................................................................................................42
4.4 Displaying System Status Messages.................................................................................................................42
4.4.1 Displaying System Configuration...........................................................................................................42
4.4.2 Displaying System Status........................................................................................................................43
4.4.3 Collecting System Diagnostic Information.............................................................................................43
5 User Management........................................................................................................................44
5.1 User Management Introduction........................................................................................................................45
5.1.1 User Interface..........................................................................................................................................45
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
Contents
5.1.2 User Authentication.................................................................................................................................46
5.2 Logging In to the S5700 Through the Console Port.........................................................................................48
5.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................48
5.2.2 Logging In to the S5700 Through the Console Interface........................................................................49
5.3 Configuring Console User Interface.................................................................................................................52
5.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................52
5.3.2 Configuring Console Interface Attributes...............................................................................................53
5.3.3 Setting Console Terminal Attributes.......................................................................................................54
5.3.4 Configuring User Priority........................................................................................................................55
5.3.5 Configuring User Authentication............................................................................................................56
5.3.6 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................57
5.4 Configuring VTY User Interface......................................................................................................................57
5.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................57
5.4.2 Configuring Maximum VTY User Interfaces.........................................................................................58
5.4.3 (Optional)Configuring Limits for Incoming Calls and Outgoing Calls..................................................59
5.4.4 Configuring VTY Terminal Attributes....................................................................................................59
5.4.5 Configuring User Authentication............................................................................................................60
5.4.6 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................62
5.5 Managing User Interfaces.................................................................................................................................62
5.5.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................62
5.5.2 Sending Messages to Other User Interfaces............................................................................................63
5.5.3 Clearing Online User...............................................................................................................................63
5.5.4 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................64
5.6 Configuring User Management........................................................................................................................64
5.6.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................64
5.6.2 Configuring Authentication Mode...........................................................................................................65
5.6.3 Configuring Authentication Password.....................................................................................................65
5.6.4 Setting Username and Password for AAA Local Authentication...........................................................66
5.6.5 Configuring Non-Authentication.............................................................................................................66
5.6.6 Configuring User Priority........................................................................................................................67
5.6.7 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................67
5.7 Configuration Examples...................................................................................................................................68
5.7.1 Example for Configuring Logging In to the Switch Through Password.................................................68
5.7.2 Example for Logging In to the Device Through AAA............................................................................69
6 File System Management...........................................................................................................71
6.1 Overview of the File System............................................................................................................................72
6.2 Managing a Storage Device..............................................................................................................................72
6.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................72
6.2.2 Restoring Storage Devices with File System Troubles...........................................................................73
6.2.3 (Optional) Formatting a Storage Device.................................................................................................73
6.3 Managing the Directory....................................................................................................................................73
6.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................73
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vi
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
Contents
6.3.2 Viewing the Current Directory................................................................................................................74
6.3.3 Switching a Directory..............................................................................................................................74
6.3.4 Displaying a Directory or File.................................................................................................................75
6.3.5 Creating a Directory................................................................................................................................75
6.3.6 Deleting a Directory................................................................................................................................75
6.4 Managing Files.................................................................................................................................................76
6.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................76
6.4.2 Displaying Contents of Files...................................................................................................................77
6.4.3 Copying Files...........................................................................................................................................77
6.4.4 Moving Files............................................................................................................................................77
6.4.5 Renaming Files........................................................................................................................................78
6.4.6 Compressing Files...................................................................................................................................78
6.4.7 Deleting Files...........................................................................................................................................78
6.4.8 Deleting Files in the Recycle Bin............................................................................................................79
6.4.9 Undeleting Files.......................................................................................................................................79
6.4.10 Running Files in Batch..........................................................................................................................80
6.4.11 Configuring Prompt Modes...................................................................................................................80
7 Management of Configuration Files........................................................................................82
7.1 Management of Configuration Files Introduction............................................................................................83
7.1.1 Configuration Files..................................................................................................................................83
7.1.2 Configuration Files and Current Configurations.....................................................................................83
7.2 Managing Configuration Files..........................................................................................................................84
7.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................84
7.2.2 Configuring System Software for a switch to Load for the Next Startup...............................................84
7.2.3 Configuring the Configuration File for Switch to Load for the Next Startup.........................................85
7.2.4 Saving Configuration File.......................................................................................................................85
7.2.5 Clearing a Configuration File..................................................................................................................86
7.2.6 Comparing Configuration Files...............................................................................................................86
7.2.7 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................87
8 FTP and TFTP...............................................................................................................................89
8.1 FTP and TFTP Introduction.............................................................................................................................90
8.1.1 FTP..........................................................................................................................................................90
8.1.2 TFTP........................................................................................................................................................90
8.2 Configuring the Switch to be the FTP Server...................................................................................................90
8.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................91
8.2.2 (Optional) Specifying a Port Number for the FTP Server.......................................................................91
8.2.3 Enabling the FTP Server..........................................................................................................................92
8.2.4 (Optional) Configuring the Timeout Period............................................................................................92
8.2.5 Configuring the Local Username and the Password...............................................................................93
8.2.6 Configuring the Service Type and Authorization Information................................................................93
8.2.7 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................94
8.3 Configuring FTP ACL......................................................................................................................................94
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
Contents
8.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................94
8.3.2 Enabling the FTP Server..........................................................................................................................95
8.3.3 Configuring a Basic ACL........................................................................................................................95
8.3.4 Configuring the Basic FTP ACL.............................................................................................................96
8.3.5 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................96
8.4 Configuring the Switch to Be the FTP Client...................................................................................................97
8.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................97
8.4.2 Logging In to the FTP Server..................................................................................................................98
8.4.3 Configuring Data Type and Transmission Mode for the File.................................................................99
8.4.4 (Optional) Viewing Online Help of the FTP Command.........................................................................99
8.4.5 Uploading or Downloading Files..........................................................................................................100
8.4.6 Managing Directories............................................................................................................................100
8.4.7 Managing Files......................................................................................................................................101
8.4.8 (Optional) Changing Login Users.........................................................................................................101
8.4.9 Disconnecting from the FTP Server......................................................................................................102
8.5 Configuring the Switch to Be the TFTP Client..............................................................................................102
8.5.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................103
8.5.2 (Optional) Configuring a Source IP Address for a TFTP Client...........................................................103
8.5.3 Downloading Files Through TFTP........................................................................................................104
8.5.4 Uploading Files Through TFTP............................................................................................................104
8.6 Limiting the Access to the TFTP Server........................................................................................................105
8.6.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................105
8.6.2 Configuring the Basic ACL...................................................................................................................105
8.6.3 Configuring the Basic TFTP ACL.........................................................................................................106
8.7 Configuration Examples.................................................................................................................................106
8.7.1 Example for Configuring the FTP Server..............................................................................................106
8.7.2 Example for Configuring an ACL of the FTP Server...........................................................................109
8.7.3 Example for Configuring the FTP Client..............................................................................................110
8.7.4 Example for Configuring the TFTP Client............................................................................................113
9 Telnet and SSH..........................................................................................................................115
9.1 Telnet and SSH Introduction..........................................................................................................................116
9.1.1 Overview of User Login........................................................................................................................116
9.1.2 Telnet Terminal Services.......................................................................................................................116
9.1.3 SSH Terminal Services..........................................................................................................................117
9.2 Configuring Telnet Terminal Services...........................................................................................................118
9.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................118
9.2.2 Enabling the Telnet Service...................................................................................................................119
9.2.3 Establishing a Telnet Connection..........................................................................................................120
9.2.4 (Optional) Configuring a Telnet Server Port Number...........................................................................121
9.2.5 (Optional) Scheduled Telnet Disconnection..........................................................................................121
9.2.6 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................122
9.3 Configuring SSH Users..................................................................................................................................122
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
viii
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
Contents
9.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................122
9.3.2 Creating SSH User.................................................................................................................................123
9.3.3 Configuring SSH for the VTY User Interface.......................................................................................124
9.3.4 Generating a Local RSA Key Pair.........................................................................................................124
9.3.5 Configuring the Authentication Mode for SSH Users...........................................................................125
9.3.6 (Optional) Configuring the Basic Authentication Information for SSH Users.....................................126
9.3.7 (Optional) Authorizing SSH Users Through the Command Line.........................................................127
9.3.8 Configuring the Service Type of SSH Users.........................................................................................128
9.3.9 (Optional) Configuring the Authorized Directory of the SFTP Service for SSH Users.......................128
9.3.10 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................129
9.4 Configuring the SSH Server Function............................................................................................................129
9.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................129
9.4.2 Enabling the STelnet Service................................................................................................................130
9.4.3 Enabling the SFTP Service....................................................................................................................130
9.4.4 Enabling SCP Services..........................................................................................................................131
9.4.5 (Optional) Enabling the Earlier Version - Compatible Function...........................................................131
9.4.6 (Optional) Configuring the Number of the Port Monitored by the SSH Server....................................132
9.4.7 (Optional) Configuring the Interval for Updating the Key Pair on the SSH Server..............................132
9.4.8 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................133
9.5 Configuring the STelnet Client Function.......................................................................................................133
9.5.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................133
9.5.2 Enabling the First-Time Authentication on the SSH Client..................................................................134
9.5.3 (Optional) Assigning an RSA Public Key to the SSH Server...............................................................135
9.5.4 Enabling the STelnet Client...................................................................................................................136
9.5.5 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................137
9.6 Configuring the SFTP Client Function...........................................................................................................138
9.6.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................138
9.6.2 Configuring the First-Time Authentication on the SSH Client.............................................................139
9.6.3 (Optional) Assigning an RSA Public Key to the SSH Server...............................................................139
9.6.4 Enabling the SFTP Client......................................................................................................................140
9.6.5 (Optional) Managing the Directory.......................................................................................................141
9.6.6 (Optional) Managing the File................................................................................................................142
9.6.7 (Optional) Displaying the SFTP Client Command Help.......................................................................144
9.6.8 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................144
9.7 Configuring the SCP Client............................................................................................................................145
9.7.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................145
9.7.2 (Optional) Configuring a Source IP Address for the SCP Client..........................................................146
9.7.3 Copying Files.........................................................................................................................................146
9.7.4 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................147
9.8 Configuration Examples.................................................................................................................................147
9.8.1 Example for Configuring the Telnet Terminal Service.........................................................................147
9.8.2 Example for Configuring the PC as the STelnet Client to Connect to the SSH Server........................150
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
Contents
9.8.3 Example for Configuring the Switch as the STelnet Client to Connect to the SSH Server .................153
9.8.4 Example for Connecting the SFTP Clinet and the SSH Server.............................................................159
9.8.5 Example for Configuring the SSH Server to Support the Access from Another Port...........................165
9.8.6 Example for Authenticating SSH Through RADIUS............................................................................172
9.8.7 Example for Configuring the SCP Client..............................................................................................177
10 Web System Configuration...................................................................................................180
10.1 Overview of Web System.............................................................................................................................181
10.2 Starting Web System....................................................................................................................................181
10.2.1 Logging In to the S5700 Through the Console Interface....................................................................181
10.2.2 Setting the Management IP Address of the S5700..............................................................................185
10.2.3 Uploading Web Page Files..................................................................................................................186
10.2.4 Loading a Web Page File.....................................................................................................................187
10.2.5 Creating a Web Account......................................................................................................................187
10.2.6 Logging In to the Web System............................................................................................................188
11 SSL Configuration...................................................................................................................190
11.1 SSL...............................................................................................................................................................191
11.2 SSL Features Supported by the S5700.........................................................................................................192
11.3 Configuring Login to an FTPS Server from a User Terminal......................................................................193
11.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................193
11.3.2 Configuring an SSL Policy and Loading a Digital Certificate............................................................194
11.3.3 Enabling the FTPS Function................................................................................................................195
11.3.4 Accessing an FTPS Server..................................................................................................................196
11.3.5 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................196
11.4 Configuring Login to an FTPS Server from an FTPS Client.......................................................................197
11.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................197
11.4.2 Configuring the FTPS Client...............................................................................................................198
11.4.3 Configuring the FTPS Server..............................................................................................................200
11.4.4 Accessing an FTPS Server..................................................................................................................201
11.4.5 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................203
11.5 Configuring Secure Web Network Management.........................................................................................204
11.5.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................205
11.5.2 Configuring an SSL Policy and Loading a Digital Certificate............................................................206
11.5.3 Loading a Web Page File.....................................................................................................................207
11.5.4 Enabling the HTTPS Function............................................................................................................207
11.5.5 Creating a Web Account......................................................................................................................208
11.5.6 Logging In to the Web System............................................................................................................209
11.5.7 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................209
11.6 Configuration Examples...............................................................................................................................210
11.6.1 Example for Configuring Login to an FTPS Server from a User Terminal........................................210
11.6.2 Example for Configuring Login to an FTPS Server from an FTPS Client.........................................214
11.6.3 Example for Configuring Secure Web Network Management............................................................222
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
x
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
1 Logging In to Switch
1
Logging In to Switch
About This Chapter
Before configuring switches, you need to log in to the switch.
1.1 Introduction
You can log in to switches through console port or Telnet.
1.2 Logging In to the Device Through the Console Port
This section describes how to connect a terminal to a switch through the console port to establish
the configuration environment.
1.3 Logging In to Device Through Telnet
This section describes how to connect a terminal to a switch through Telnet to establish the
configuration environment.
1.4 Configuration Examples
This section provides examples for configuring users to log in to the switch through the console
port or Telnet together with the configuration flowchart. The configuration examples explain
networking requirements, configuration notes, and configuration roadmap.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
1 Logging In to Switch
1.1 Introduction
You can log in to switches through console port or Telnet.
1.1.1 Login Through the Console
When a switch is powered on for the first time or a switch needs to be locally configured, you
can log in to the switch through the console port.
In the following cases, a switch can be configured only through the console port:
l
The switch is powered on for the first time.
l
The subscriber cannot login through Telnet.
1.1.2 Login Through Telnet
If you know the IP address of a switch, you can log in to the switch through Telnet to perform
local or remote configurations.
YYou need to pre-configure the IP addresses of interfaces, the user account, the authentication
mode, and the incoming and outgoing call restriction through the console interface on the
switch. Also, ensure that directly-connected or reachable switch exist between terminals and the
switch.
The destination switch authenticates the user based on the configured parameters in three modes:
l
Password authentication: indicates that the login user should enter the correct password.
l
AAA local authentication: indicates that the login user should enter the correct user name
and password.
l
None authentication: indicates that the login user need not enter the user name or password.
If the login succeeds, a command line prompt such as <Quidway> appears on the Telnet client
interface.
Enter a command to check the running status of the switch or to configure the switch.
Enter "?" for help.
NOTE
Do not modify the IP address of the switch when you configure the switch through Telnet because the
modification may terminate Telnet connection. Otherwise, set up the connection again after entering a new
IP address.
1.2 Logging In to the Device Through the Console Port
This section describes how to connect a terminal to a switch through the console port to establish
the configuration environment.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
1 Logging In to Switch
1.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring login to the switch through the console port, familiarize yourself with the
applicable environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This
can help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
If you log in to the switch for the first time or perform the local configuration, you need to log
in to the switch through the console port.
NOTE
If you cannot log in to the switch through the telnet, you need to log in to the switch through the console
port.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring login to the switch through the console port, complete the following tasks:
l
Preparing the PC/terminal (including serial port and RS-232 cable)
l
Installing terminal emulation program on the PC (such as Windows XP HyperTerminal)
Data Preparation
To login the switch through the console port, you need the following data.
NOTE
If the AAA authentication mode is configured for users to log in to the switch through the console interface,
the correct user name and password must be entered for a successful login.
No.
Data
1
Terminal communication parameters
l Baud rate
l Data bit
l Parity
l Stop bit
l Flow-control mode
2
(Optional) User name and password to be entered for a successful login in AAA
authentication mode
1.2.2 Establishing the Physical Connection
This part describes how to physically connect a terminal to a switch before login to the switch
through the console port.
Context
Do as follows on the switch:
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
1 Logging In to Switch
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the COM port on the PC and the console port on the switch by a cable.
Step 2 Power on all devices to perform a self-check.
----End
1.2.3 Configuring Terminals
This part describes how to configure the terminal before login to the switch through the console
port.
Context
Do as follows on the PC:
Procedure
Step 1 Run the terminal emulation program on the PC, setting the communication parameters as
follows:
l Baud rate: 9600 bps
l Data bit: 8
l Stop bit: 1
l Parity: none
l Flow control: none
----End
1.2.4 Logging In to the Device
This part describes how to log in to the switch through the console port.
Context
Do as follows on the PC:
Procedure
Step 1 Press Enter until a command line prompt such as <Quidway> appears. Now the user view is
displayed for you to configure the switch.
NOTE
If the AAA or Password authentication mode is configured for users to log in to the switch through the
console interface, the correct user name and password must be entered for a successful login.
----End
1.3 Logging In to Device Through Telnet
This section describes how to connect a terminal to a switch through Telnet to establish the
configuration environment.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
1 Logging In to Switch
1.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring login to the switch through Telnet, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help
you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
If you know the IP address of the switch, you can log in to the switch through Telnet for local
or remote configuration.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the switch through Telnet, complete the following tasks:
l
Powering on devices and performing a self-check
l
Preparing the PC (including the serial port and Ethernet crossover/direct cable)
Data Preparation
To log in to the switch through Telnet, you need the following data.
No.
Data
1
IP address of the PC
2
IP address of the Ethernet interface on the switch
3
User information accessed through Telnet:
l User name
l Password
l Authentication mode
1.3.2 Establishing the Physical Connection
This part describes how to physically connect a terminal to a switch before login to the switch
through Telnet.
Prerequisite
Establishing the Physical Connection are complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the switch and the PC directly or connect the switch and the PC to the network through
cables.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
1 Logging In to Switch
1.3.3 Configuring Login User Parameters
This part describes how to configure user parameters for login to the switch through Telnet.
Context
Do as follows on the switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the authentication mode of login users.
Step 2 Configure the authority limitation of login user.
For details, see 5.4 Configuring VTY User Interface and 5.6 Configuring User
Management.
----End
1.3.4 Logging In from the Telnet Client
This part describes how to log in to the switch through Telnet.
Context
Do as follows on the PC:
Procedure
Step 1 Run the Telnet program on the PC that functions as a client, and enter the IP address of the
interface on the destination switch that provides the Telnet service.
Step 2 Enter the user name and password in the login window. After authentication, a command line
prompt such as <Quidway> appears. Now enter the configuration environment in the user view.
----End
1.4 Configuration Examples
This section provides examples for configuring users to log in to the switch through the console
port or Telnet together with the configuration flowchart. The configuration examples explain
networking requirements, configuration notes, and configuration roadmap.
1.4.1 Example for Logging In Through the Console Port
In this example, you can configure the PC so as to log in to the switch through the console port.
Networking Requirements
Initialize the configuration of the switch when the switch is powered on for the first time.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
1 Logging In to Switch
Figure 1-1 Networking diagram of logging in through the console port
PC
Switch
Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1.
Connect the PC and the switch through the console port.
2.
Configure the login on the PC end.
3.
Log in to the switch.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the terminal communication parameters (including
baud rate, data bit, parity, stop bit, and flow control).
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the serial port of the PC (or terminal) to the console port of the switch through a standard
RS-232 cable. The local configuration environment is established.
Step 2 Run the terminal emulation program on the PC. Set the terminal communication parameters to
be 9600 bps, data bit to be 8, stop bit to be 1. Specify no parity and no flow control as shown
from Figure 1-2 to Figure 1-4.
Figure 1-2 New connection
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
1 Logging In to Switch
Figure 1-3 Setting the port
Figure 1-4 Setting the port communication parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
1 Logging In to Switch
Step 3 Power on the switch to perform a self-check and the system performs automatic configuration.
When the self-check ends, you are prompted to press Enter until a command line prompt such
as <Quidway> appears.
Enter the command to check the running status of the switch or configure the switch.
Enter "?" for help.
----End
1.4.2 Example for Logging In Through Telnet
In this example, you can configure user parameters so as to log in to the switch from the PC or
other terminals through Telnet.
Networking Requirements
You can log in to the switch on other network segments through the PC or other terminals to
perform remote maintenance.
Figure 1-5 Establishing the configuration environment through WAN
IP
Network
PC
Switch
Target
Switch
Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1.
Establish the physical connection.
2.
Configure user login parameters.
3.
Log in to the switch from the client side.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data
l
IP address of the PC
l
IP address of the Ethernet interface on the switch
l
User information accessed through Telnet (including the user name, password, and
authentication mode)
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the PC and the switch to the network.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
1 Logging In to Switch
Step 2 Configure login user parameters on the target switch.
# Configure the login address
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] vlan 10
[Quidway-vlan10] quit
[Quidway] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port link-type hybrid
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port hybrid pvid vlan 10
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port untagged vlan 10
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] quit
[Quidway]interface vlanif 10
[Quidway-vlanif10] ip address 202.38.160.92 255.255.0.0
[Quidway-vlanif10] quit
# Configure login authentication mode
[Quidway] aaa
[Quidway-aaa] local-user huawei password cipher hello
[Quidway-aaa] local-user huawei service-type telnet
[Quidway-aaa] local-user huawei level 3
[Quidway-aaa] quit
[Quidway] user-interface vty 0 4
[Quidway-ui-vty0-14] authentication-mode aaa
Step 3 Configure the client login.
Run the Telnet on the PC, as shown in Figure 1-6.
Figure 1-6 Running the Telnet program on the PC
Click OK.
Enter the user name and password in the login window. After authentication, a command line
prompt such as <Quidway> appears. Now enter the configuration environment in the user view.
NOTE
Before logging in to the switch, ensure that the PC and switch can ping each other.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
2 CLI Overview
2
CLI Overview
About This Chapter
Users operate devices, that is, configure the device and perform routine maintenance, by entering
command lines.
2.1 CLI Introduction
The command line interface (CLI) is the common tool for running commands.
2.2 Online Help
When you enter command lines or configure services, online help offers real-time help in
addition to the configuration guide.
2.3 Features of Command Line Interface
You can edit command lines, display command lines, use the regular expression for command
lines, and invoke historical commands.
2.4 Shortcut Keys
Using the system shortcut keys makes it easier to enter commands.
2.5 Configuration Examples
This section provides several examples for using command lines.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
2 CLI Overview
2.1 CLI Introduction
The command line interface (CLI) is the common tool for running commands.
2.1.1 Command Line Interface
You can configure and manage a switch by using the CLI commands.
When a prompt appears, you enter the command line interface (CLI) and interact with switch
through CLI.
The system provides a series of configuration commands. You can configure and manage the
switch by entering commands on CLI.
The characteristics of CLI are as follows:
l
Local configuration through console port.
l
Local or remote configuration through Telnet or Secure Shell (SSH).
l
A user interface view for specific configuration management.
l
Hierarchical command protection for users of different levels, that is, running the
commands of the corresponding level.
l
None authentication, password authentication and Authentication, Authorization and
Accounting (AAA) to prevent the unauthorized user from accessing the switch.
l
Entering "?" for online help at any time.
l
Network testing commands such as tracert and ping for rapidly diagnosing a network.
l
Abundant debugging information to help in diagnosing the network.
l
The telnet command for directly logging in to and manage other switch.
l
FTP service for file uploading and downloading.
l
Running a history command, like DosKey.
l
A command line interpreter provides intelligent command resolution methods such as key
word fuzzy match and context conjunction. These methods make it easy for users to enter
their commands.
NOTE
l The system supports the command with up to 512 characters. The command can be incomplete.
l The system saves the incomplete command to the configuration files in the complete form; therefore,
the command may have more than 512 characters. When the system is restarted, however, the
incomplete command cannot be restored. Therefore, pay attention to the length of the incomplete
command.
2.1.2 Command Levels
The system adopts a hierarchical protection mode that has 16 command levels.
The default command levels are as follows:
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Level 0-Visit level: Commands of this level include commands of network diagnosis tool
(such as ping and tracert) and commands that start from the local device and visit external
device (such as Telnet client side).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
2 CLI Overview
l
Level 1-Monitoring level: Commands of this level, including the display commands, are
used for system maintenance and fault diagnosis.
l
Level 2-Configuration level: Commands of this level are service configuration commands
that provide direct network service to the user, including routing and network layer
commands.
l
Level 3-Management level: Commands of this level are commands that influence the basic
operation of the system and provide support to the service. They include file system
commands, FTP commands, TFTP commands, XModem downloading commands,
configuration file switching commands, power supply control commands, backup board
control commands, user management commands, level setting commands, system internal
parameter setting commands, and debugging commands that are used for fault diagnosis.
CAUTION
Not all display commands are of the monitoring level. For example, the display currentconfiguration and display saved-configuration commands are of the management level. For
the level of a command, see the Quidway S5700 Series Command Reference.
To implement efficient management, you can increase the command levels to 0-15. For the
increase in the command levels, refer to Chapter 4 "Basic Configuration" Configuring
Command Levels in the Quidway S5700 Series Configuration Guide - Basic Configurations.
NOTE
l The default command level may be higher than the command level defined according to the command
rules in application.
l Login users have the same 16 levels as the command levels. The login users can use only the command
of the levels that are equal to or lower than their own levels. For details of login user levels, refer to
User Management.
2.1.3 Command Views
The command line interface has different command views. All the commands must register in
one or more command views. You can run a command only when you enter the corresponding
command view.
Basic Concepts of Command Views
# Establish connection with the switch. If the switch adopts the default configuration, you can
enter the user view with the prompt of <Quidway>.
<Quidway>
# Type system-view, and you can enter the system view.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway]
# Type aaa in the system view, and you can enter the AAA view.
[Quidway] aaa
[Quidway-aaa]
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
2 CLI Overview
NOTE
The prompt <Quidway> indicates the default switch name. The prompt <> indicates the user view and the
prompt [] indicates other views.
Some commands that are implemented in the system view can also be implemented in the other
views; however, the functions that can be implemented are command view-specific.
Common Views
The S5700 provides various command line views. For the methods of entering the command
line views except the following views, see the Quidway S5700 Command Reference.
l
l
l
User View
Item
Description
Function
Displays the running status and statistics of the S5700.
Entry command
Enters the user view after the connection is set up.
Prompt upon
entry
<Quidway>
Quit command
<Quidway>quit
Prompt upon
quit
None.
System View
Item
Description
Function
Sets the system parameters of the S5700, and enters other function
views from this view.
Entry command
<Quidway> system-view
Prompt upon
entry
[Quidway]
Quit command
[Quidway] quit
Prompt upon
quit
<Quidway>
Ethernet Interface View
– GE interface view
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Item
Description
Function
Configures related parameters about the GE interfaces of the
S5700 and manages the GE interfaces.
Entry
command
[Quidway] interface GigabitEthernet X/Y/Z
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
2 CLI Overview
Item
Description
Prompt upon
entry
[Quidway-GigabitEthernetX/Y/Z]
Quit command
[Quidway-GigabitEthernetX/Y/Z] quit
Prompt upon
quit
[Quidway]
NOTE
X/Y/Z indicates the number of a GE interface that needs to be configured. It is in the format of
slot number/sub card number/interface sequence number.
If an LPU provides GE interfaces and 10GE interfaces, the difference lies in the subcard where
the 10GE interfaces reside. Generally, the sequence number of a 10GE interface is 1. If an LPU
provides only 10GE interfaces, the method of entering the 10GE interface view is the same as
the method of entering the GE interface view.
2.2 Online Help
When you enter command lines or configure services, online help offers real-time help in
addition to the configuration guide.
Context
The command line of S5700 provides three types of online help:
l
Full help
l
Partial help
l
Error Messages of the Command Line Interface
2.2.1 Full Help
When you enter a command line, you can view the description of keywords or parameters in the
command line through the Full Help.
You can obtain full help from a command view in the following methods:
l
In a command view, enter ? to obtain all the commands in this command view and
descriptions of the commands.
<Quidway> ?
l
Enter a command and a ? separated by a space. If a keyword is in place of the ?, all keywords
and their descriptions are listed. Here is an example.
[Quidway-ui-vty0] authentication-mode ?
aaa
AAA authentication
none
Login without checking
password Authentication through the password of a user terminal interface
[Quidway-ui-vty0] authentication-mode aaa ?
<cr>
[Quidway-ui-vty0] authentication-mode aaa
aaa, none and password are keywords. AAA authentication, Login without checking and
Authentication through the password of a user terminal interface are the descriptions of the
two keywords.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
2 CLI Overview
<cr> indicates that no key word or parameter is in this position and you can press Enter to
repeat the command in the next command line.
l
Enter a command and a ? separated by a space. If a parameter is in place of the ?, all
parameters and their descriptions are listed. Here is an example.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname ?
TEXT Host name(1 to 246 characters)
TEXT is a parameter and Host name (1 to 246 characters) is the description.
2.2.2 Partial Help
When you enter a command line, you can obtain prompts on the keywords or parameters at the
beginning of the string through the Partial Help.
Context
You can obtain the partial help of the command line in the following ways.
Procedure
l
Enter a character string with a "?" closely following it to display all commands that begin
with this character string.
<Quidway> d?
debugging
dir
l
Enter a command and a character string with "?" closely following it to display all the key
words that begin with this character string.
<Quidway> display b?
bfd
bootrom
bpdu-tunnel
l
delete
display
bgp
bpdu
buffer
Enter the first several letters of a key word in the command and then press Tab to display
the complete key word on the condition that the letters uniquely identify the key word.
Otherwise, if you continue to press Tab, different key words are displayed. You can select
the needed key word.
----End
2.2.3 Error Messages of the Command Line Interface
If an entered command passes the syntax check, the system executes it. Otherwise, the system
prompts an error message.
All the commands entered by the user are run correctly, if the grammar check has been passed.
Otherwise, error messages are reported to the user. See Table 2-1 for the common error
messages.
Table 2-1 Common error messages of the command line
Error messages
Cause of the error
Unrecognized command
The command cannot be found
The key word cannot be found
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
2 CLI Overview
Error messages
Cause of the error
Wrong parameter
Parameter type error
The parameter value exceeds the limit
Incomplete command
Incomplete command entered
Too many parameters
Too many parameters entered
Ambiguous command
Indefinite parameters entered
2.3 Features of Command Line Interface
You can edit command lines, display command lines, use the regular expression for command
lines, and invoke historical commands.
2.3.1 Editing
The editing function of command lines helps you edit command lines or obtain help by using
certain keys.
The command line supports multi-line edition. The maximum length of each command is 512
characters.
Keys for editing that are often used are shown in Table 2-2.
Table 2-2 Keys for editing
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Key
Function
Common key
Inserts a character in the current position of the cursor if the editing
buffer is not full and the cursor moves to the right. Otherwise, an
alarm is generated.
Backspace
Deletes the character on the left of the cursor that moves to the
left. When the cursor reaches the head of the command, an alarm
is generated.
Left cursor key ← or
Ctrl_B
Moves the cursor to the left by the space of a character. When the
cursor reaches the head of the command, an alarm is generated.
Right cursor key → or
Ctrl_F
Moves the cursor to the right by the space of a character. When
the cursor reaches the end of the command, an alarm is generated.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
2 CLI Overview
Key
Function
Tab
Press Tab after typing the incomplete key word and the system
runs the partial help:
l If the matching key word is unique, the system replaces the
typed one with the complete key word and displays it in a new
line with the cursor a space behind.
l If there are several matches or no match at all, the system
displays the prefix first. Then you can press Tab to view the
matching key word one by one. In this case, the cursor closely
follows the end of the word and you can type a space to enter
the next word.
l If a wrong key word is entered, press Tab and the word is
displayed in a new line.
2.3.2 Displaying
All command lines have the same displaying feature. You can construct the displaying mode as
required.
You can control the display of information on CLI as follows:
l
Display prompt and help information in both Chinese and English.
l
When the information displayed exceeds a full screen, it provides the pause function. In
this case, the user has three choices as shown in Table 2-3.
Table 2-3 Keys for displaying
Key
Function
Ctrl_C
Stops the display and running of the command.
NOTE
You can also press any of the keys except the spacebar and Enter key
to stop the display and running of the command.
Space
Continues to display the information on the next screen.
Enter
Continues to display the information on the next line.
2.3.3 Regular Expressions
The regular expression is a mode matching tool. You can construct the matching mode based
on certain rules, and then match the mode with the target object.
The regular expression is an expression that describes a set of strings. It consists of common
characters (such as letters from "a" to "z") and particular characters (also named metacharacters).
The regular expression is a template according to which you can search for the required string.
A regular expression can provide the following functions:
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
2 CLI Overview
l
Searching for and obtaining a sub-string that matches a rule in the string.
l
Substituting a string according to a certain matching rule.
Formal Language Theory of the Regular Expression
The regular expression consists of common characters and particular characters.
l
Common characters
Common characters are used to match themselves in a string, including all upper-case and
lower-case letters, digits, punctuations, and special symbols. For example, a matches the
letter "a" in "abc", 202 matches the digit "202" in "202.113.25.155", and @ matches the
symbol "@" in "[email protected]".
l
Particular characters
Particular characters are used together with common characters to match the complex or
particular string combination. Table 2-4 describes particular characters and their syntax.
Table 2-4 Description of particular characters
Particul
ar
characte
r
Syntax
Example
\
Defines an escape character, which
is used to mark the next character
(common or particular) as the
common character.
\* matches "*".
^
Matches the starting position of the
string.
^10 matches "10.10.10.1" instead of
"20.10.10.1".
$
Matches the ending position of the
string.
1$ matches "10.10.10.1" instead of
"10.10.10.2".
*
Matches the preceding element zero
or more times.
10* matches "1", "10", "100", and
"1000".
(10)* matches "null", "10", "1010",
and "101010".
+
Matches the preceding element one
or more times
10+ matches "10", "100", and
"1000".
(10)+ matches "10", "1010", and
"101010".
?
.
Matches the preceding element zero
or one time.
10? matches "1" and "10".
Matches any single character.
0.0 matches "0x0" and "020".
(10)? matches "null" and "10".
.oo matches "book", "look", and
"tool".
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
19
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
2 CLI Overview
Particul
ar
characte
r
Syntax
Example
()
Defines a subexpression, which can
be null. Both the expression and the
subexpression should be matched.
100(200)+ matches "100200" and
"100200200".
x|y
Matches x or y.
100|200 matches "100" or "200".
1(2|3)4 matches "124" or "134",
instead of "1234", "14", "1224", and
"1334".
[xyz]
Matches any single character in the
regular expression.
[123] matches the character 2 in
"255".
[^xyz]
Matches any character that is not
contained within the brackets.
[^123] matches any character except
for "1", "2", and "3".
[a-z]
Matches any character within the
specified range.
[0-9] matches any character ranging
from 0 to 9.
[^a-z]
Matches any character beyond the
specified range.
[^0-9] matches all non-numeric
characters.
_
Matches a comma "," left brace "{",
right brace "}", left parenthesis "(",
and right parenthesis ")".
_2008_ matches "2008", "space
2008 space", "space 2008", "2008
space", ",2008,", "{2008}",
"(2008)", "{2008", and "(2008}".
Matches the starting position of the
input string.
Matches the ending position of the
input string.
Matches a space.
NOTE
Unless otherwise specified, all characters in the preceding table are displayed on the screen.
l
Degeneration of particular characters
Certain particular characters, when being placed at the following positions in the regular
expression, degenerate to common characters.
– The particular characters following "\" is transferred to match particular characters
themselves.
– The particular characters "*", "+", and "?" placed at the starting position of the regular
expression. For example, +45 matches "+45" and abc(*def) matches "abc*def".
– The particular character "^" placed at any position except for the start of the regular
expression. For example, abc^ matches "abc^".
– The particular character "$" placed at any position except for the end of the regular
expression. For example, 12$2 matches "12$2".
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
2 CLI Overview
– The right bracket such as ")" or "]" being not paired with its corresponding left bracket
"(" or "[". For example, abc) matches "abc)" and 0-9] matches "0-9]".
NOTE
Unless otherwise specified, degeneration rules are applicable when preceding regular expressions
serve as subexpressions within parentheses.
l
Combination of common and particular characters
In actual application, a regular expression combines multiple common and particular
characters to match certain strings.
Specifying a Filtering Mode in Command
CAUTION
The Quidway S5700 Series uses a regular expression to implement the filtering function of the
pipe character. A display command supports the pipe character only when there is excessive
output information.
When the output information is queried according to the filtering conditions, the first line of the
command output starts with the information containing the regular expression.
The command can carry the parameter | count to display the number of matching entries. The
parameter | count can be used together with other parameters.
For the commands supporting regular expressions, the three filtering methods are as follows:
l
| begin regular-expression: displays the information that begins with the line that matches
regular expression.
l
| exclude regular-expression: displays the information that excludes the lines that match
regular expression.
l
| include regular-expression: displays the information that includes the lines that match
regular expression.
NOTE
The value of regular-expression is a string of 1 to 255 characters.
Specify a Filtering Mode when Information is Displayed
When a lot of information is displayed, you can specify a filtering mode in the prompt "---- More
----".
l
/regular-expression: displays the information that begins with the line that matches regular
expression.
l
-regular-expression: displays the information that excludes lines that match regular
expression.
l
+regular-expression: displays the information that includes lines that match regular
expression.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
2 CLI Overview
2.3.4 History Commands
The command line interface provides a function similar to DosKey, which can automatically
save historical commands. You can invoke the historical commands saved on the command line
interface at any time and run them again.
By default, the system saves 10 history commands at most for each user. The operations are as
shown in Table 2-5.
Table 2-5 Access the history commands
Action
Key or Command
Result
Display the
history
commands.
display historycommand
Display the history commands entered by users.
Access the last
history
command.
Up cursor key↑ or
Ctrl_P
Display the last history command if there is an
earlier history command. Otherwise, a bell is
generated.
Access the next
history
command.
Down cursor key ↓
or Ctrl_N
Display the next history command if there is a later
history command. Otherwise, the command is
cleared and a bell is generated.
NOTE
On the HyperTerminal of Windows 9X, cursor key ↑ is invalid as the HyperTerminals of Windows 9X
define the keys differently. In this case, you can replace the cursor key ↑ with Ctrl_P.
When you use the history commands, note the following:
l
The saved history commands are the same as that those entered by users. For example, if
the user enters an incomplete command, the saved command also is incomplete.
l
If the user runs the same command several times, the earliest command is saved. If the
command is entered in different forms, they are considered as different commands.
For example, if the display ip routing-table command is run several times, only one history
command is saved. If the disp ip routing command and the display ip routing-table
command are run, two history commands are saved.
2.4 Shortcut Keys
Using the system shortcut keys makes it easier to enter commands.
2.4.1 System Shortcut Keys
System-defined shortcut keys with fixed functions are defined by the system. Table 2-6 lists the
system-defined shortcut keys.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
2 CLI Overview
NOTE
Different terminal software defines these keys differently. Therefore, the shortcut keys on the terminal may
be different from those listed in this section.
Table 2-6 System-defined shortcut keys
Key
Function
CTRL_A
The cursor moves to the beginning of the current line.
CTRL_B
The cursor moves to the left by the space of a character.
CTRL_C
Terminates the running function.
CTRL_D
Deletes the character where the cursor lies.
CTRL_E
The cursor moves to the end of the current line.
CTRL_F
The cursor moves to the right by the space of a character.
CTRL_H
Deletes one character on the left of the cursor.
CTRL_K
Stops the creation of the outbound connection.
CTRL_N
Displays the next command in the history command buffer.
CTRL_P
Displays the previous command in the history command buffer.
CTRL_R
Repeats the display of the information of the current line.
CTRL_T
Terminates the outbound connection.
CTRL_V
Pastes the contents on the clipboard.
CTRL_W
Deletes a character string or character on the left of the cursor.
CTRL_X
Deletes all the characters on the left of the cursor.
CTRL_Y
Deletes all the characters on the right of the cursor.
CTRL_Z
Returns to the user view.
CTRL_]
Terminates the inbound or redirection connections.
ESC_B
The cursor moves to the left by the space of a word.
ESC_D
Deletes a word on the right of the cursor.
ESC_F
The cursor moves to the right to the end of next word.
ESC_N
The cursor moves downward to the next line.
ESC_P
The cursor moves upward to the previous line.
2.5 Configuration Examples
This section provides several examples for using command lines.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
2 CLI Overview
2.5.1 Example for Using the Tab Key
You can obtain prompts on keywords or check whether the entered keywords are correct by
pressing Tab.
Procedure
l
If only one keyword contains the incomplete keyword,
do as follows on the S5700.
1.
Enter an incomplete keyword.
[Quidway] info-
2.
Press Tab.
The system replaces the incomplete keyword with a complete keyword and displays
the complete keyword in another line. There is only one space between the cursor and
the end of the keyword.
[Quidway] info-center
l
If more than one keyword contains the incomplete keyword,
do as follows on the S5700.
# The keyword info-center can be followed by the following keywords.
[Quidway] info-center log?
logbuffer
1.
loghost
Enter an incomplete keyword.
[Quidway] info-center l
2.
Press Tab.
The system displays the prefix of all the matched keywords. The prefix in this example
is log.
[Quidway] info-center log
3.
Continue to press Tab to display all the keywords. There is no space between the
cursor and the end of the keywords.
[Quidway] info-center loghost
[Quidway] info-center logbuffer
Stop pressing Tab when you find the required keyword logbuffer.
4.
Enter a space and enter the next keyword channel.
[Quidway] info-center logbuffer channel
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
3 How to Use Interfaces
3
How to Use Interfaces
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the concept of the interface and the basic configuration about the interface.
3.1 Introduction to Interfaces
This section describes different types of interfaces. The interfaces are provided by the S5700 to
receive and send data.
3.2 Setting Basic Parameters of an Interface
This section describes how to set the basic parameters of an interface.
3.3 Configuring the Loopback Interface
This section describes how to configure the loopback interface.
3.4 Maintaining the Interface
This section describes how to maintain the interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
3 How to Use Interfaces
3.1 Introduction to Interfaces
This section describes different types of interfaces. The interfaces are provided by the S5700 to
receive and send data.
Interfaces are classified into management interfaces and service interfaces based on their
functions; interfaces are classified into physical interfaces and logical interfaces based on their
physical forms.
NOTE
A physical interface is sometimes called a port. Both physical interfaces and logical interfaces are called
interfaces in this document.
Management Interface
Management interfaces are used to manage and configure a device. You can log in to the
S5700 through a management interface to configure and manage the S5700. Management
interfaces do not transmit service data.
The S5700 provides a console interface and an MEth interface as the management interface.
Table 3-1 Description of management interfaces
Name
Description
Usage
Console
interface
The console interface complies
with the EIA/TIA-232 standard
and the interface type is DCE.
The console interface is connected to the
COM series port of a configuration
terminal. It is used to set up the onsite
configuration environment.
MEth
interface
The MEth interface complies with
the 10/100BASE-TX standard.
The MEth interface can be connected to
the network interface of a configuration
terminal or network management
workstation. It is used to set up the onsite
or remote configuration environment.
The following table shows the rule for numbering management interfaces.
Table 3-2 Management interface numbers
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Name
Number
Console interface
Console 0
MEth interface
MEth 0/0/1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
3 How to Use Interfaces
Classification of Service Interfaces
Service interfaces are used to transmit service data. They are classified into 1 Gbit/s interfaces
and 10 Gbit/s interfaces according to their rates; they are classified into electrical interfaces and
optical interfaces according to their electrical properties.
The rules for numbering service interfaces are as follows:
In a single S5700, interfaces are numbered in the format slot ID/subcard ID/interface sequence
number.
l
Slot ID: indicates the slot where an interface is located. The value is 0.
l
Subcard ID: indicates the subcard where an interface is located. The value is 0 or 1.
The value 1 indicates that the subcard is a front card.
l
Interface sequence number: indicates the sequence number of an interface.
In a stack system, interfaces are numbered in the format stack ID/subcard ID/interface sequence
number.
l
Stack ID: indicates the ID of an S5700 in the stack system. The value ranges from 0 to 8.
l
Subcard ID: indicates the ID of a subcard. The value is 0 or 1.
The value 1 indicates that the subcard is a front card.
l
Interface sequence number: indicates the sequence number of an interface on the S5700.
Table 3-3 FE and GE interface numbering rule
Figure of Interface Numbering
2
4
6
...
5
...
...
1
3
Description
The S5700 has two rows of service
interfaces with the lower-left interface
numbered 1. The other interfaces are
numbered in ascending order from
bottom to up, and then from left to right.
For example, the upper-left interface
numbered 0/0/2.
Physical Interfaces
Physical interfaces are interfaces that actually exist on the S5700.
Physical interfaces include management interfaces and service interfaces.
The S5700 supports the following physical interfaces:
l
Console interface
l
Eth interface
l
Gigabit Ethernet interface
l
10 Gigabit Ethernet interface
Logical Interfaces
Logical interfaces do not exist and are set up by configurations.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
3 How to Use Interfaces
The S5700 supports the following logical interfaces:
l
Eth-Trunk
The Eth-Trunk consists of Ethernet links only.
The Eth-Trunk technique has the following advantages:
– Increased bandwidth: The bandwidth of an Eth-Trunk is the total bandwidth of all
member interfaces.
– Improved reliability: When a link fails, traffic is automatically switched to other
available links. This ensures link reliability.
For details about the Eth-Trunk configuration, see "Configuring the Eth-Trunk" in the
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches Configuration Guide - Ethernet.
l
Loopback interface
A loopback interface is a virtual interface. The TCP/IP protocol suite defines IP address
127.0.0.0 as a loopback address. When the system starts, it automatically creates an
interface using the loopback address 127.0.0.1 to receive all data packets sent to the local
device.
Some applications such as mutual access between virtual private networks need a local
interface with a specified IP address without affecting the configuration of physical
interfaces. This IP address has a 32-bit mask (to save IP addresses) and can be advertised
by routing protocols.
The status of a loopback interface is always Up; therefore, the IP address of the loopback
interface can be used as the router ID, the label switching router (LSR) ID, or be land to a
tunnel.
For details, see 3.3 Configuring the Loopback Interface.
l
Null interface
Null interfaces are similar to null devices supported by certain operating systems. Any data
packets sent to a null interface are discarded. Null interfaces are used for route selection
and policy-based routing (PBR). For example, if a packet matches no route during route
selection, the packet is sent to the null interface.
l
Tunnel interface
A tunnel interface can be used as the backup interface of other interfaces and used to set
up Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) tunnels or Multiprotocol Label Switching
(MPLS) Traffic Engineering (TE) tunnels.
l
VLANIF interface
When the S5700 needs to communicate with devices at the network layer, you can create
a logical interface of the Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) on the S5700, namely, a
VLANIF interface. You can assign IP addresses to VLANIF interfaces because VLANIF
interfaces work at the network layer. The S5700 then communicates with devices at the
network layer through VLANIF interfaces.
For details about the configuration, see "Configuring the VLANIF Interface" in the
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches Configuration Guide - Ethernet.
3.2 Setting Basic Parameters of an Interface
This section describes how to set the basic parameters of an interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
3 How to Use Interfaces
3.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring advanced functions of an interface such as the working mode and routes,
you need to complete the basic configuration of the interface.
Applicable Environment
To facilitate the configuration and maintenance of an interface, the S5700 provides interface
views. The commands related to the interface are valid only in the interface views.
The basic interface configurations include entering an interface view, configuring interface
description, enabling an interface, and disabling an interface.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Installing the LPU on the S5700
Data Preparation
To set parameters of an interface, you need the following data.
No.
Data
1
Type and number of the interface to be configured
2
Description of the interface
3.2.2 Entering the Interface View
To configure an interface, you need to enter the interface view.
Context
Do as follows on the S5700.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The view of a specified interface is displayed.
interface-type specifies the type of the interface and interface-number specifies the number of
the interface.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
3 How to Use Interfaces
3.2.3 Viewing All the Commands in the Interface View
After entering the interface view, you can view all the commands in the interface view.
Context
Do as follows on the S5700.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The view of a specified interface is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
?
All the commands in the view of the specified interface are displayed.
----End
3.2.4 Configuring the Description for an Interface
The description configured for an interface on the S5700 helps you identify and memorize the
usage of the interface, which facilitates the management.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The view of a specified interface is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
description description
The description is configured for the interface.
----End
3.2.5 Starting and Shutting Down an Interface
When a physical interface is idle and is not connected to a cable, shut down this interface to
protect the interface against interference. To use a shutdown interface, you need to start the
interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
3 How to Use Interfaces
Context
NOTE
l A null interface is always Up and cannot be shut down by command.
l A loopback interface is always Up and cannot be shut down by command.
Procedure
l
Shutting down the interface
Do as follows on the S5700.
1.
Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2.
Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The view of a specified interface is displayed.
3.
Run:
shutdown
The interface is shut down.
NOTE
By default, an interface is enabled.
l
Starting an interface
Do as follows on the S5700.
1.
Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2.
Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The view of a specified interface is displayed.
3.
Run:
undo shutdown
The interface is started.
----End
3.2.6 Further Configuration an Interface
After configuring basic parameters, configure the interface as required.
Context
When you access a network through an interface, you need to further setting multiple parameters
of the interface based on the networking requirements in addition to performing basic
configurations on the interface.
Further configurations of an interface include:
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
l
Configuring the operation mode of an interface
l
Configuring routes
3 How to Use Interfaces
For the detailed Configuration, please see the other configuration manuals of S5700.
For the detailed Configuration, please see Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Ethernet and Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches Configuration
Guide - IP Routing.
3.2.7 Checking the Configuration
After completing the basic configuration of an interface, you can use the display commands to
check the configuration.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display interface [ interface-type [ interface-number ] ] command to check the running
status of the interface and the statistics on the interface.
Step 2 Run the display interface description command to check the brief information about the
interface
Step 3 Run the display ip interface [ interface-type interface-number ] command to check the main
configurations of the interface.
Step 4 Run the display ip interface brief [ interface-type interface-number ] command to check the
brief state of the interface.
----End
3.3 Configuring the Loopback Interface
This section describes how to configure the loopback interface.
3.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
The users can create or delete a loopback interface. When being created, the loopback interface
remains in the Up state until you delete it.
Applicable Environment
Some applications such as mutual access between virtual private networks need to be configured
with a local interface with a specified IP address when the configuration of a physical interface
is not affected. In this case, the IP address of the local interface needs to be advertised by routing
protocols. Loopback interfaces are used to improve the reliability of the configuration.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the loopback interface, complete the following task:
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Switching on the S5700
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
3 How to Use Interfaces
Data Preparation
To configure the loopback interface, you need the following data.
No.
Data
1
Number of the loopback interface
2
IP address of the loopback interface
3.3.2 Configuring IPv4 Parameters of the Loopback Interface
A loopback interface can be assigned an IPv4 address, bound to a VPN instance, and configured
to check the source IPv4 addresses of packets.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
interface loopback interface-number
A loopback interface is created.
The value of interface-number ranges from 0 to 1023. A maximum of 1024 loopback interfaces
can be created.
Step 3 Run:
ip address ip-address { mask | mask-length } [ sub ]
An IPv4 address is assigned to the loopback interface.
Step 4 (Optional) Run:
ip verify source-address
The loopback interface is configured to check the source IPv4 addresses of packets.
----End
3.3.3 Checking the Configuration
After configuring a loopback interface, run the following commands to check the configuration.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display interface loopback [ number ] command to check the status of the loopback
interface.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
3 How to Use Interfaces
3.4 Maintaining the Interface
This section describes how to maintain the interface.
3.4.1 Clearing Statistics Information on the Interface
The statistics on the interface cannot be restored after you clear them. So, confirm the action
before you use the command.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the reset counters interface [ interface-type [ interface-number ] ] command in the user
view to clear the statistics on the interface.
----End
3.4.2 Debugging the Interface
When an interface works abnormally, you can debug the interface.
Context
CAUTION
Debugging affects the performance of the system. So, after debugging, run the undo debugging
all command to disable it immediately.
For the description about debugging commands, see the Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet
Switches Debugging Reference.
For details about debugging commands on an interface, see the following chapters.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
4 Basic Configuration
4
Basic Configuration
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to configure the basic system environment and the basic user
environment.
4.1 Basic Configuration Introduction
This section describes the meaning and scope of the basic configuration.
4.2 Configuring the Basic System Environment
This section describes how to configure the basic system environment according to user habits
or the requirements of the actual environment.
4.3 Configuring Basic User Environment
This section describes the configuration of the basic user environment for user level switching.
4.4 Displaying System Status Messages
This section describes the display commands that are used for displaying basic system
configurations.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
4 Basic Configuration
4.1 Basic Configuration Introduction
This section describes the meaning and scope of the basic configuration.
Before configuring services, users often need to perform basic configurations for actual
operation and maintenance.
The S5700 provides configurations of two kinds of basic environments:
l
Basic system environment: includes the language mode, host name, system name, system
time, header text, and command level for actual environment.
l
Basic user environment: includes password for changing levels and the terminal lock.
4.2 Configuring the Basic System Environment
This section describes how to configure the basic system environment according to user habits
or the requirements of the actual environment.
4.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring the basic system environment, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help
you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
Before configuring the services, you need to configure the basic system environments to meet
the requirements of the actual environments.
By default, the S5700 supports commands of Level 0 to Level 3, namely, visit level, monitoring
level, configuration level, and management level.
If the user needs to define more levels, or refine management privileges on the device, the user
can extend the range of command line level from the range of Level 0 to Level 3 to the range of
Level 0 to Level 15.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring basic system environment, complete the following task:
l
Powering on the switch
Data Preparation
To configure basic system environment, you need the following data.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
No.
Data
1
System time
2
Host name
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
No.
Data
3
Login information
4
Command level
4 Basic Configuration
4.2.2 Configuring the Equipment Name
You can change the equipment name as required. The new equipment name takes effect
immediately.
Context
Do as follows on the switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
sysname host-name
The equipment name is set.
You can change the name of the switch that appears in the command prompt.
By default, the host name of the switch is Quidway.
----End
4.2.3 Setting the System Clock
To ensure that devices on the network work with the same clock, you need to set or change the
system clock.
Context
You need to set the system time properly to ensure the cooperation between the S5700 and other
devices. The S5700 supports the configurations of the time zone and the daylight saving time.
NOTE
UTC indicates the Universal Time Coordinated.
Do as follows on the switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
clock datetime
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
HH:MM:SS YYYY-MM-DD
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
4 Basic Configuration
The current date and time is set.
Step 2 Run:
clock timezone time-zone-name { add | minus } offset
The time zone is set.
l If add is configured, the current time is the UTC time plus the time offset. That is, the default
UTC time plus offset is equal to the time of time-zone-name.
l If minus is configured, the current time is the UTC time minus the time offset. That is, the
default UTC time minus offset is equal to the time of time-zone-name.
Step 3 Run:
clock daylight-saving-time time-zone-name one-year start-time start-date end-time
end-date offset
or
clock daylight-saving-time time-zone-name repeating start-time { { first | second
| third | fourth | last } weekday month | start-date } end-time { { first |
second | third | fourth | last } weekday month | end-date } offset [ start-year
[ end-year ] ]
The daylight saving time is set.
During the configuration of the daylight saving time, you can configure the start time and end
time in one of the following modes: date+date, week+week, date+week, and week+date. For
details, see clock daylight-saving-time.
NOTE
When the current time is within the daylight saving time, running the clock timezone time-zone-name
{ add | minus } offset command can successfully set the time zone name. If the display clock command
is run to view the time zone name at the moment, the time zone name, however, is displayed as the name
of the daylight saving time. After the daylight saving time ends, the set time zone name can be displayed.
----End
4.2.4 Configuring a Header
If you need to provide information for login users, you can configure a header that the system
displays during login or after login.
Context
Do as follows on the switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
header login { information text | file file-name }
The header displayed during login is set.
Step 3 Run:
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
4 Basic Configuration
header shell { information text | file file-name }
The header displayed after login is set.
A header is a system prompt displayed when a user logs in to the switch or starts interactive
configuration with the switch. The header provides detailed instruction.
NOTE
l If a user logs in to the switch by using SSH1.X, the login header is not displayed during login, but the
shell header is displayed after login.
l If a user logs in to the switch by using SSH2.0, both login and shell headers are displayed.
----End
4.2.5 Configuring Command Levels
By default, commands are registered in the sequence of Level 0 to Level 3. If refined rights
management is required, you can divide commands in to 16 levels, that is, from Level 0 to Level
15.
Context
If the user does not adjust a command level separately, after the command level is updated, all
originally-registered command lines adjust automatically according to the following rules:
l
The commands of Level 0 and Level 1 remain unchanged.
l
The command Level 2 is updated to Level 10 and Level 3 is updated to Level 15.
l
No command lines exist in Level 2 to Level 9 and Level 11 to Level 14. The user can adjust
the command lines to these levels separately to refine the management of privilege.
NOTE
The updation of command Level 2 to Level 10 and Level 3 to Level 15 is not a two-step process but onestep by batch.
Do as follows on the switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
command-privilege level rearrange
Update the command level in batch.
When no password is configured for a Level 15 user, the system prompts the user to set a superpassword for the level 15 user. At the same time, the system asks if the user wants to continue
to update the command line level. Then, just select "N" to set a password. If you select "Y", the
command level can be updated in batch directly. This results in the user not logging in through
the Console port and failing to update the level.
Step 3 Run:
command-privilege level level view view-name command-key
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
4 Basic Configuration
The command level is configured. With the command, you can specify the level and view
multiple commands at one time (command-key).
All commands have default command views and levels. You need not reconfigure them.
----End
4.3 Configuring Basic User Environment
This section describes the configuration of the basic user environment for user level switching.
4.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring the basic user environment, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help
you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
The user can log in to a switch with lower level to perform simple configurations or view
configurations. When the configuration is complicated, the user needs to switch to a high level.
Thus, it requires the user to configure the basic environment for switching levels.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the basic environment for the user, complete the following task:
l
Powering on the switch properly
Data Preparation
To configure the basic environment for the user, you need the following data:
No.
Data
1
Password for the user level switching
4.3.2 Configuring the Password for Switching User Levels
Passwords need to be set for users that are switched from lower levels to higher levels.
Context
When users log in to the switch with a lower user level, they switch to a higher user level to
perform advanced operations by entering the corresponding password. The password needs to
be configured in advance.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
4 Basic Configuration
CAUTION
When simple is used, the password is saved in the configuration files in simple text. Login users
with lower level can obtain the password by viewing the configuration. This may cause security
problems. Therefore, cipher is used to save the password in encrypted text.
If the pass word is set in cipher mode, the password cannot be resumed from the system. Save
the password to avoid oblivion or miss.
Do as follows on the switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
super password [ level user-level ] { simple | cipher } password
The password for switching user levels is configured.
----End
4.3.3 Switching User Levels
You need to enter the set password when being switched from a lower level to a higher level.
Context
An accurate password must be entered when the user is switched from a lower level to a higher
level.
Do as follows on the switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
super [ level ]
User levels are switched.
Step 2 Follow the prompt and enter a password.
If the password entered is correct, the user can switch to a higher level. If the user enters a
password incorrectly for three consecutive times, the user remains at the current login level and
returns to the user view.
NOTE
When the login user of lower level is switched to the user of higher level through the super command, the
system automatically sends trap messages and records the switchover in a log. When the switched level
is lower than that of the current level, the system only records the switchover in a log.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
4 Basic Configuration
4.3.4 Locking User Interfaces
You can enter the set password to unlock the locked user interface.
Context
When you leave the operation terminals for a moment, you can lock the user interface to prevent
unauthorized users from operating the interface.
Do as follows on the switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
lock
The user interface is locked.
Step 2 Follow the system prompt and input an unlock password, and then confirm.
<Quidway> lock
Enter Password:
Confirm Password:
If the locking is successful, the system prompts that the user interface is locked.
You must enter a correct password to unlock the user interface.
----End
4.4 Displaying System Status Messages
This section describes the display commands that are used for displaying basic system
configurations.
Context
You can use the display commands to collect information about the system status. The display
commands are classified according to the following functions:
l
Displays system configurations.
l
Displays the running status of the system.
l
Displays the diagnostic information about a system.
l
Displays the restart information about the main control board.
See the related sections for display commands for protocols and interfaces. The following only
shows the system display commands.
Run the following commands in any view.
4.4.1 Displaying System Configuration
You can view information about the system version, system time, original configuration, and
current configuration.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
4 Basic Configuration
Prerequisite
Basic Configuration are complete.
Procedure
l
Run the display version command to display the system version.
l
Run the display clock command to display the system time.
l
Run the display saved-configuration command to display the original configuration.
l
Run the display current-configuration command to display the current configuration.
----End
4.4.2 Displaying System Status
You can view the configuration of the current view.
Prerequisite
Basic configuration are complete.
Procedure
l
Run the display this command to display the configuration of the current view.
----End
4.4.3 Collecting System Diagnostic Information
You can view the system diagnosis information.
Context
Basic configuration is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
display diagnostic-information [ file-name ]
The system diagnosis information is displayed.
When the system fails or performs the routine maintenance, you need to collect a lot of
information to locate faults. Then, you have to run different display commands to collect all
information. In this case, you can use the display diagnostic-information command to collect
all information about the current running modules in the system.
The display diagnostic-information command collects all information collected by running
the following commands, including display clock, display version, display cpu-usage, display
interface, display current-configuration, display saved-configuration, display historycommand, and so on.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
5 User Management
5
User Management
About This Chapter
This chapter describes user interfaces and the configuration of users' login.
5.1 User Management Introduction
This section describes basic concepts of user interfaces and user management.
5.2 Logging In to the S5700 Through the Console Port
This section describes how to log in to the S5700 through the console port.
5.3 Configuring Console User Interface
You can configure the console user interface so as to maintain a switch on the local device.
5.4 Configuring VTY User Interface
You can configure the VTY user interface to maintain a remote switch.
5.5 Managing User Interfaces
You need to configure user management to ensure that the operator manages switchs safely.
5.6 Configuring User Management
Through user management, you can create users for switchs, set user passwords, and manage
users.
5.7 Configuration Examples
This section provides examples for configuring users to log in to a switch in different modes.
These configuration examples explain networking requirements, configuration roadmap, and
configuration notes.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
5 User Management
5.1 User Management Introduction
This section describes basic concepts of user interfaces and user management.
5.1.1 User Interface
A user interface (UI) enables users to log in to the S5700. Through a user interface, you can
configure the parameters on all physical and logical interfaces that work in asynchronous and
interactive modes. In this manner, you can manage, authenticate, and authorize the login users.
Types of User Interfaces
Table 5-1 describes the types of user interfaces supported by the S5700.
Table 5-1 Types of user interfaces
Type
Purpose
Description
CON
Local login through the
console interface
It is a linear interface conforming to the EIA/TIA-232
standard. The type of the interface is DCE. Each
device provides a console interface.
VTY
Local or remote login
through Telnet or SSH
It is a virtual interface and indicates a logical terminal
line. When you log in to the S5700 through Telnet,
FTP, or SSH, a VTY connection is set up.
Numbering of User Interfaces
You can number a user interface in the following ways:
l
Relative numbering
Relative numbering indicates that the interfaces of the same type are numbered. The relative
numbering uniquely specifies a user interface of a specified type.
The format of the relative numbering is: user interface type + number. It must comply with
the following rules:
– Number of the CON interface: console0
– Default number of the VTY: vty0, vty1, vty2, vty3, and vty4
l
Absolute numbering
The S5700 uniquely specifies the default numbers of 0, 34… 38 for the user interfaces of
CON and VTY. You can enter a specific user interface view by entering any of these
numbers.
l
Mapping between relative numbering and absolute numbering
Figure 5-1 shows the mapping between relative and absolute numbering of a user interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
5 User Management
Figure 5-1 Numbering of user interfaces on the S5700
Types ofset
interface
CON
Relative
numbering
Obsolute
numbering
console0
0
……
VTY
vty0
34
vty1
35
vty2
36
vty3
37
vty4
38
In the figure, console 0 and 0 indicate the same user interface; vty1 and 35 indicate the
same user interface.
NOTE
On the S5700, the absolute number can be 0 or 34 to 48.
5.1.2 User Authentication
When a user logs in to the S5700, the S5700 authenticates the user according to the configuration
to ensure system security.
When the S5700 is switched on for the first time, no authentication information for login is
available in the system. In this case, you can log in to the S5700 through the console interface
without being authenticated.
If a user logs in to the S5700 through Telnet on an Ethernet interface, the login user must be
authenticated for the sake of security. If the authentication succeeds, the user can log in to the
S5700 to configure and maintain the S5700.
To manage users that try to log in to the S5700, these users are assigned with passwords and
classified into different levels.
Classifying Login Users
Login users on the S5700 are classified according to service types and assigned rights assigned,
as shown in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2 Types of login users
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
User Type
Description
Authentication
Super users
Logs in to the S5700 through the console interface
and have all rights.
Not authenticated for
the first login but
recommended later
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
5 User Management
User Type
Description
Authentication
Telnet users
Logs in to the S5700 through the Ethernet interface
using Telnet and have limited rights. A Telnet
connection is set up between the user terminal and the
S5700.
Recommended
SSH users
Logs in to the S5700 through the Ethernet interface
using SSH and have limited rights. An SSH
connection is set up between the user terminal and the
S5700.
Recommended
FTP users
Logs in to the S5700 through FTP on the Ethernet
interface and have limited rights. An FTP connection
is set up between the user terminal and the S5700.
Recommended
The rights that can be obtained by users logging in to the S5700 through Telnet, SSH, and FTP
depend on the priorities of the user interfaces through which they log in to. The S5700 provides
multiple services for a user. To ensure login convenience and security, login users must be
classified, and then assigned levels.
Priorities of Users
The system manages super users and Telnet users according to user levels.
Similar to the command levels, users are classified into 16 levels numbered 0 to 15. The greater
the number, the higher the user level.
NOTE
If the user levels are not set, the four default user levels are used, namely, levels 0 to 3.
The level of the command that a user can run is determined by the level of this user.
l
In the case of non-authentication or password authentication, the level of the command that
the user can run depends on the level of the user interface.
l
In the case of AAA authentication, the command that the user can run depends on the level
of the local user specified in AAA configuration.
Users of a level can access the commands of this level or lower levels.
Assuming that user levels 0 to 3 are used in the system, users of level 2 can access commands
of levels 0, 1, and 2, and users of level 3 can access commands at all levels.
Authenticating Login Users
After users are configured on the S5700, the system authenticates the users when they log in to
the S5700. The S5700 provides three authentication modes, as shown in Table 5-3.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
5 User Management
Table 5-3 Authentication modes of login users
Authenticatio
n Mode
Description
Nonauthentication
Users can log in to the S5700 without entering the user name and password.
There is a great potential security risk.
Password
authentication
Users can log in to the S5700 by entering only the password. In this
manner, security is ensured.
AAA
authentication
Users need to enter both the user name and password to log in to the
S5700. The S5700 then authenticates the users according to the configured
user information. This further improves security. It applies to the users
logging in to the S5700 through the console interface and Telnet users.
5.2 Logging In to the S5700 Through the Console Port
This section describes how to log in to the S5700 through the console port.
5.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Applicable Environment
You need to log in to the S5700 through the console interface, as shown in Figure 5-2. In the
figure, Switch is an S5700.
Figure 5-2 Logging in to the S5700 through the console interface
RS-232 serial interface
PC
Console interface
Switch
NOTE
If the S5700 is switched on for the first time and you need to manage and configure the S5700, you can
log in to the S5700 through the console interface only.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before logging in to the S5700 through the console interface, complete the following tasks:
l
Connecting the PC and the S5700 correctly
l
Starting the S5700 normally
Data Preparation
None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
5 User Management
5.2.2 Logging In to the S5700 Through the Console Interface
Context
When setting up a local configuration environment through the console interface, you can
connect the PC and the S5700 through the Windows HyperTerminal.
Procedure
Step 1 Enable the HyperTerminal on the PC.
Choose Start > All Programs > Accessories > Communications > HyperTerminal to start
the HyperTerminal.
Step 2 Set up a new connection.
As shown in Figure 5-3, enter the name of the new connection in the Name text box and choose
an icon. Click OK.
Figure 5-3 Setting up a new connection
Step 3 Set the connection port.
After entering the Connect window as shown in Figure 5-4, select a serial port from the
Connect drop-down list box according to the port used by the PC or the configuration terminal.
Select COM1 in this case, and click OK.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
5 User Management
Figure 5-4 Setting the connection port
Step 4 Set communication parameters.
After entering the COM1 Properties window as shown in Figure 5-5, set the communication
parameters according to the description in Table 5-4.
NOTE
In other Windows operating systems, Bits per second may be described as Baud rate; Flow control may
be described as Traffic control.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
5 User Management
Figure 5-5 Setting communication parameters for the port
Table 5-4 Communication parameters
Parameter
Value
Bit per second (Baud rate)
9600
Data bit
8
Parity check
None
Stop bit
1
Flow control (Traffic control)
None
Step 5 After the HyperTerminal is started, select File Attributes to enter the Connect Properties
window as shown in Figure 5-6. Choose the Setting tab, select Auto detect or VT100 from the
Emulation drop-down list box. Click OK to complete the setting.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
5 User Management
Figure 5-6 Selecting a terminal type
After the preceding steps are complete, press Enter. If the prompt <Quidway> is displayed, it
indicates that you have logged in to the S5700. At this time, you can enter the command to
configure and manage the S5700.
----End
5.3 Configuring Console User Interface
You can configure the console user interface so as to maintain a switch on the local device.
5.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring a console interface, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete
the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
A console user interface is required for maintaining the local switch.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring a console interface, complete the following tasks:
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
l
Powering on the switch
l
Connecting a PC to the switch
5 User Management
Data Preparation
To configure a console interface, you need the following data.
No.
Data
1
Baud rate, flow-control mode, parity, stop bit, and data bit
2
Idle timeout period, number of lines displayed in a terminal screen, number of
characters in each line displayed in a terminal screen,and the size of history command
buffer
3
User priority
4
User authentication method, user name, and password
NOTE
All the configuration items of the switch, excluding the user name and password, have default values and
do not need to be configured additionally.
5.3.2 Configuring Console Interface Attributes
You can configure the rate, flow control mode, parity mode, stop bit, and data bit for the console
port.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that the user logs in to:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
user-interface console interface-number
The console user interface view is displayed.
Step 3 (Optional) Run:
speed speed-value
The baud rate is set.
By default, the baud rate is 9600 bit/s.
Step 4 (Optional) Run:
flow-control { hardware | none | software }
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
5 User Management
The flow control mode is set. By default, the flow-control mode is none.
Step 5 (Optional) Run:
parity { even | mark | none | odd | space }
The parity mode is set.
By default, the value is none.
Step 6 (Optional) Run:
stopbits { 1.5 | 1 | 2 }
The stop bit is set.
By default, the value is 1 bit.
Step 7 (Optional) Run:
databits { 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 }
The data bit is set.
By default, the data bit is 8.
NOTE
When the user logs in to a switch through a console port, the configured attributes for the console port on
the HyperTerminal should be in accordance with the attributes of the interface on the switch. Otherwise,
the user cannot log in to the switch.
----End
5.3.3 Setting Console Terminal Attributes
You can configure the timeout period for idle users, maximum number of lines to displayed on
each screenor the maximum number of characters in each line, and the size of historical command
buffer for the console interface.
Context
Do as follows on the switch to which a user logs in:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
user-interface console interface-number
The console interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
shell
The terminal service is started.
Step 4 Run:
idle-timeout minutes [ seconds ]
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
5 User Management
The timeout period for idle users is set.
By default, the timeout period for idle users is 10 minutes.
Step 5 Run:
screen-length screen-length
The number of lines to be displayed on each screen is set.
By default, a terminal displays 24 lines on each screen.
You can run the screen-length screen-length temporary command to specify the number of
lines that a terminal displays on each screen.
Step 6 Run:
screen-width screen-width
The maximum number of characters in each line displayed on a terminal screen is set.
By default, each line displayed on a terminal screen has a maximum of 80 characters.
Step 7 Run:
history-command max-size size-value
The buffer of the history command is set.
By default,the history command buffer on a user interface can cache a maximum of 10
commands.
----End
5.3.4 Configuring User Priority
You can set the priority for a user who logs in through the console port.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that the user logs in to:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
user-interface console interface-number
The console user interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
user privilege level level
The priority of the user is set.
This process is to set the priority for a user who logs in through the console port. A user can only
use the command of the level corresponding to the user level.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
5 User Management
For more information about the command priority, see "Command Level" in Chapter 3 "CLI
Overview".
----End
5.3.5 Configuring User Authentication
The system provides three authentication modes, namely, AAA, password, and none.
Procedure
l
Configuring AAA Authentication
1.
Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2.
Run:
user-interface console interface-number
The console user interface view is displayed.
3.
Run:
authentication-mode aaa
The authentication mode is set to AAA.
4.
Run:
quit
Exit from the console user interface view.
5.
Run:
aaa
The AAA view is displayed.
6.
Run:
local-user user-name password { simple | cipher } password
Name and password of the local user are created.
l
Configuring Password Authentication
1.
Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2.
Run:
user-interface console interface-number
The console user interface view is displayed.
3.
Run:
authentication-mode password
You can set the authentication mode as password authentication.
4.
Run:
set authentication password { cipher | simple } password
A password for authentication is set.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
l
5 User Management
Configuring Non-Authentication
1.
Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2.
Run:
user-interface console interface-number
The console user interface view is displayed.
3.
Run:
authentication-mode none
The authentication mode is set to non-authentication.
----End
5.3.6 Checking the Configuration
After configuring the console user interface, you can view the usage information of the user
interface, physical attributes and configurations of the user interface, local user list, and online
users.
Prerequisite
The configurations of the User Management function are complete.
Procedure
l
Run the display users [ all ] command to check information about user interface.
l
Run the display user-interface console ui-number1 [ summary ] command to check
physical attributes and configurations of the user interface.
l
Run the display local-user command to check the local user list.
l
Run the display access-user command to check online users.
----End
5.4 Configuring VTY User Interface
You can configure the VTY user interface to maintain a remote switch.
5.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring a VTY interface, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete
the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
If you want to log in to the switch using Telnet or SSH to perform management or configuration
operations, .a VTY interface is required.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
5 User Management
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring a VTY user interface, complete the following tasks:
l
Powering on the switch
l
Connecting a PC to the switch correctly
Data Preparation
To configure a VTY user interface, you need the following data.
No.
Data
1
Maximum VTY user interfaces
2
(Optional) Number of the ACL for limiting incoming and outgoing calls of users
logging in using VTY user interfaces
3
Timeout period for idle users, maximum number of lines to be displayed on each
screen , maximum number of characters in each line, and the size of the history
command buffer
4
User authentication mode, user name, and password
5.4.2 Configuring Maximum VTY User Interfaces
You can configure the maximum number of VTY user interfaces through which users log in to
a switch.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that the user logs in to:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
user-interface maximum-vty number
The maximum VTY user interfaces that can log in to the switch is set.
NOTE
When the maximum number of VTY user interfaces is set to zero, any user including the NMS user cannot
log in to a switch.
If the maximum number of VTY user interfaces to be configured is smaller than the maximum
number of current interfaces, other parameters need not be configured.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
5 User Management
If the maximum number of VTY user interfaces to be configured is larger than the maximum
number of current interfaces, the authentication mode and password need to be configured for
newly added user interfaces.
For newly added user interfaces, the system applies password authentication by default.
For example, a maximum of five users are allowed online. To allow 15 VTY users online at the
same time, you need to run the authentication-mode command and the set authentication
password command to configure authentication modes and passwords for user interfaces from
VTY 5 to VTY 14. The command is run as follows:
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] user-interface maximum-vty 15
[Quidway] user-interface vty 5 14
[Quidway-ui-vty5-14] authentication-mode password
[Quidway-ui-vty5-14] set authentication password cipher huawei
----End
5.4.3 (Optional)Configuring Limits for Incoming Calls and
Outgoing Calls
You can set the limit on incoming and outgoing calls for VTY user interfaces.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that the user logs in to:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
user-interface vty first-ui-number [ last-ui-number ]
The VTY user interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
acl acl-number { inbound | outbound }
The limits to calling in/out of VTY are configured.
When you need to prevent a user of certain address or segment address from logging in to the
switch, use the inbound command; when you need to prevent a user who logs in to a switch
from accessing other switchs, use the outbound command.
----End
5.4.4 Configuring VTY Terminal Attributes
You can configure the timeout period for idle users, maximum number of lines to be displayed
on each screenor the maximum number of characters in each line, and the size of the historical
command buffer for a VTY interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
5 User Management
Context
Do as follows on the switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
user-interface vty number1 [ number2 ]
The VTY interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
shell
Terminal services are enabled.
Step 4 Run:
idle-timeout minutes [ seconds ]
The timeout period for idle users is set.
Step 5 Run:
screen-length screen-length
The maximum number of lines to be displayed on each screen is set.
By default, a maximum of 24 lines are displayed on each screen.
You can run the screen-length screen-length temporary command to specify the maximum
number of lines to be temporarily displayed on each terminal screen.
Step 6 Run:
screen-width screen-width
The maximum number of characters in each line displayed on a terminal screen is set.
By default, each line displayed on a terminal screen has a maximum of 80 characters.
Step 7 Run:
history-command max-size size-value
The size of the history command buffer is set.
By default, the history command buffer on a user interface can cache a maximum of 10
commands.
----End
5.4.5 Configuring User Authentication
The system provides three authentication modes, namely, AAA, password, and none.
Context
The switch supports user authentication of three types:
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
60
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
5 User Management
l
AAA authentication: requires the user name and password.
l
Password authentication: requires no user name but a password must be set. Otherwise, the
user can log in to the switch only through the console interface.
l
None: requires neither user name nor password. No authentication is needed when the user
logs in to the switch.
l
Configuring AAA Authentication
Procedure
1.
Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2.
Run:
user-interface vty number1 [ number2 ]
The VTY user interface view is displayed.
3.
Run:
authentication-mode aaa
The authentication mode is set to AAA.
4.
Run:
quit
Exit from the VTY user interface view.
5.
Run:
aaa
The AAA view is displayed.
6.
Run:
local-user user-name password { simple | cipher } password
Name and password of the local user are created.
l
Configuring Password Authentication
1.
Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2.
Run:
user-interface vty number1 [ number2 ]
The VTY user interface view is displayed.
3.
Run:
authentication-mode password
Set the authentication mode as password.
4.
Run:
set authentication password { cipher | simple } password
A password for this authentication mode is set.
l
Configuring Non-Authentication
1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Do as follows on the switch, run:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
5 User Management
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2.
Run:
user-interface vty number1 [ number2 ]
The VTY user interface view is displayed.
3.
Run:
authentication-mode none
The authentication mode is set to none.
----End
5.4.6 Checking the Configuration
After configuring the VTY user interface, you can view the usage information of the user
interface, the maximum number of VTY user interfaces, and physical attributes and
configurations of the user interface.
Prerequisite
The configuration of VTY User Interface are complete.
Procedure
l
Run the display users [ all ] command to check the usage information of the user interface.
l
Run the display user-interface maximum-vty command to check the number of maximum
VTY user interfaces.
l
Run the display user-interface [ [ ui-type ] ui-number1 | ui-number ] [ summary ]
command to check the physical attributes and configurations of the user interface.
----End
5.5 Managing User Interfaces
You need to configure user management to ensure that the operator manages switchs safely.
5.5.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring user management interfaces, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help
you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
To ensure that the operator managesswitchs safely, you need to send messages between user
interfaces and clear designated user.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before managing the user interface, complete the following tasks:
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
62
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
l
Powering on the switch
l
Connecting the PC with the switch properly
5 User Management
Data Preparations
To manage the user interface, you need the following data:
No.
Data
1
Type and number of the user interface
2
Contents of the message to be sent
5.5.2 Sending Messages to Other User Interfaces
You can configure messaging between user interfaces.
Context
Do as follows on the switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
send { all | ui-type ui-number | ui-number1 }
You can enable message sending between user interfaces.
Step 2 Following the prompt, you can enter the message to be sent. You can press Ctrl_Z or Enter to
end, and press Ctrl_C to abort.
----End
5.5.3 Clearing Online User
You can clear specified online users.
Context
Do as follows on the switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
free user-interface { ui-number | ui-type ui-number1 }
Online users are cleared.
Step 2 On receiving the prompts, you can confirm whether the designated online users have to be
cleared.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
63
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
5 User Management
5.5.4 Checking the Configuration
After configuring user management interfaces, you can view the usage information of user
interfaces.
Prerequisite
The configuration of User Interfaces are complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display users [ all ] command to check the usage information of the user interface.
----End
5.6 Configuring User Management
Through user management, you can create users for switchs, set user passwords, and manage
users.
5.6.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring user management, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete
the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
After the IP address is assigned to the main control board or the interface board, any remote user
can use Telnet to log in to the switch, or connect the switch through PPP to access networks.
This compromises the security. To ensure network security and ease user management, configure
a user name and the user password for the switch.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring a user, complete the following tasks:
l
Powering on the switch
l
Connecting the PC with the switch properly
Data Preparation
To configure a user, you need the following data.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
No.
Data
1
Authentication mode
2
User name and password
3
User priority
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
5 User Management
5.6.2 Configuring Authentication Mode
The system provides three authentication modes, namely, AAA local authentication, password
authentication, and none authentication.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that the user logs in to:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
user-interface [ ui-type ] first-ui-number [ last-ui-number ]
The user interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
authentication-mode { aaa | password | none }
The user authentication mode is configured.
----End
5.6.3 Configuring Authentication Password
You can configure a plain or cipher text password for authentication.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that the user logs in to:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
user-interface [ ui-type ] first-ui-number [ last-ui-number ]
The user interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
authentication-mode password
The authentication mode is set to Password.
Step 4 Run:
set authentication password { cipher | simple } password
The authentication password is configured.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
5 User Management
NOTE
The default authentication mode is the password authentication.
----End
5.6.4 Setting Username and Password for AAA Local
Authentication
You can configure a plain or cipher text password for AAA local authentication.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that the user logs in to:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
user-interface [ ui-type ] first-ui-number [ last-ui-number ]
The user interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
authentication-mode aaa
The authentication mode is set to AAA.
Step 4 Run:
quit
Return to the system view.
Step 5 Run:
aaa
The AAA view is displayed.
Step 6 Run:
local-user user-name password { simple | cipher } password
The local username and the password are configured.
----End
5.6.5 Configuring Non-Authentication
You can configure users to log in to a switch without being authenticated.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
5 User Management
Context
CAUTION
Configuring the non-authentication mode may cause security problems of the switch.
Do as follows on the switch that the user logs in to:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
user-interface [ ui-type ] first-ui-number [ last-ui-number ]
The user interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
authentication-mode none
The non-authentication mode is configured.
NOTE
l If the authentication mode is non-authentication or password authentication, the priority of the userinterface determines the command level that the users can access.
l If the authentication mode needs the username and the password, the priority of the user determines
the command level that the users can access.
----End
5.6.6 Configuring User Priority
You can configure the user priority.
Context
Refer to the Quidway S5700 Series Configuration Guide - Security.
5.6.7 Checking the Configuration
After configuring user management, you can view the usage information of user interfaces, local
user list, and online users.
Prerequisite
The configuration of User Management are complete.
Procedure
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Run the display users [ all ] command to check the user information.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
l
Run the display local-user command to check the local user list.
l
Run the display access-user command to check online users.
5 User Management
----End
5.7 Configuration Examples
This section provides examples for configuring users to log in to a switch in different modes.
These configuration examples explain networking requirements, configuration roadmap, and
configuration notes.
Context
CAUTION
After the first and second configuration examples are complete, the commands with priorities
higher than 2 cannot be run if the current user is VTY0. Ensure that users can log in to
theswitch in other methods to delete configurations.
5.7.1 Example for Configuring Logging In to the Switch Through
Password
In this example, the VTY0 priority, authentication mode, and disconnection time are configured,
which enables users to log in to the switch through a password.
Networking Requirements
The COM port of the PC is connected with the Console port. Set the priority of VTY0 to 2 and
authenticate the passwords of users. Users need to enter the password Huawei to log in
successfully.
After login, if the operations are not carried out in 30 minutes, it means that the user-interface
is disconnected from the switch.
Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1.
Enter the user interface, and configure the priority of VTY0 as 2.
2.
Configure the simple authentication and the disconnect time.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l
The password of the authentication mode
l
The disconnect time
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
68
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
5 User Management
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the priority of VTY0 to be 2 on the Switch.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] user-interface vty0
[Quidway-ui-vty0] user privilege level 2
Step 2 Configuring password and disconnect time.
[Quidway-ui-vty0] authentication-mode password
[Quidway-ui-vty0] set authentication password simple huawei
[Quidway-ui-vty0] idle-timeout 30
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname Quidway
#
aaa
authentication-scheme default
authorization-scheme default
accounting-scheme default
domain default
#
user-interface vty 0
user privilege level 2
set authentication password simple huawei
idle-timeout 30
#
return
5.7.2 Example for Logging In to the Device Through AAA
In this example, the VTY0 priority and disconnection time are configured and the idle-out
function is enabled for local users, which enables users to log in to the switch through AAA
authentication.
Networking Requirements
The COM port of the PC and the console port of the switch are connected.
Configure the priority of VTY0 to be 2, perform AAA authentication on the user that logs in
through VTY0. The login user must enter the username "huawei" and the password "huawei".
After login, if the user does not operate the switch within 30 minutes, the connection with the
switch is disabled.
Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1.
Enter the user interface view to configure the priority of VTY0 to be 2 and the disconnection
time.
2.
Enter the AAA view to configure the username, the password, and the user level.
3.
Switch on the idle timeout for the local user in the AAA view.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
69
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
l
Username and password for authentication
l
Disconnect time
5 User Management
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the priority of VTY0 to be 2 and the disconnection time within 30 minutes.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] user-interface vty0
[Quidway-ui-vty0] user privilege level 2
[Quidway-ui-vty0] authentication-mode aaa
[Quidway-ui-vty0] idle-timeout 30
[Quidway-ui-vty0] quit
Step 2 Configuring the local username, the password, and user level.
[Quidway] aaa
[Quidway-aaa] local-user huawei password cipher huawei
[Quidway-aaa] local-user huawei privilege level 2
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname Quidway
#
aaa
local-user huawei password cipher N`C55QK<`=/Q=^Q`MAF4<1!!
local-user huawei privilege level 2
local-user huawei idle-cut
#
authorization-scheme default
#
accounting-scheme default
#
domain default
#
user-interface vty 0
authentication-mode aaa
user privilege level 2
idle-timeout 30
#
return
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
6 File System Management
6
File System Management
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the basic knowledge of the file system, including the methods of managing
files, directories, and storage devices.
6.1 Overview of the File System
This section describes the concepts of the file system.
6.2 Managing a Storage Device
This section describes how to format a storage device.
6.3 Managing the Directory
You can manage directories to logically store files in hierarchy.
6.4 Managing Files
You can view, create, delete, and rename files.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
6 File System Management
6.1 Overview of the File System
This section describes the concepts of the file system.
Basic Concepts of the File System
A file system allows you to manage files and directories on the storage devices. In the file system,
you can create, delete, modify, and rename a file or a directory, and view contents of a file.
The file system provides the following functions:
l
Managing the files that are stored on the storage devices
l
Managing the storage devices
Storage Device
A storage device is a hardware device used to store data.
Different products support different storage devices. Currently, the S5700 supports the flash
memory.
File
A file stores and manages information.
Directory
A directory collects and organizes files. It is a logical container of files.
6.2 Managing a Storage Device
This section describes how to format a storage device.
6.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before managing a storage device, complete the following tasks:
l
Installing the S5700 and switching it on properly
l
Client logging in to the S5700
Data Preparation
To manage a storage device, you need the following data.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
No.
Data
1
Device name
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
6 File System Management
6.2.2 Restoring Storage Devices with File System Troubles
When the file system on a storage device fails, the terminal of the switch prompts you to rectify
the fault.
Context
Do as follows on the switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
fixdisk device-name
The storage devices with file system troubles is repaired.
NOTE
After this command is run, if the prompt that the system should be repaired is still received, it indicates
that the physical medium may be damaged.
----End
6.2.3 (Optional) Formatting a Storage Device
Context
CAUTION
After the format flash: command is run, the files and directories in the Flash are cleared and
cannot be restored. So, confirm the action before you use the command.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the following command in the user view:
format flash:
The flash is formatted.
----End
6.3 Managing the Directory
You can manage directories to logically store files in hierarchy.
6.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before managing directories, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment, complete
the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete the
configuration task quickly and accurately.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
73
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
6 File System Management
Applicable Environment
When you need to transfer files between the client and the server, configure the directory by
using the file system.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the management directory, complete the following tasks:
l
Powering on the switch
l
Connecting the client with the server correctly
Data Preparation
To configure a management directory, you need the following data.
No.
Data
1
Directory name to be created
2
Directory name to be deleted
6.3.2 Viewing the Current Directory
You can view the current directory to know its information.
Context
Do as follows on the switch.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
pwd
The current directory is displayed.
----End
6.3.3 Switching a Directory
You can switch the current directory to another directory.
Context
Do as follows on the switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
cd directory
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
6 File System Management
A directory is specified.
Step 2 Run:
pwd
The current directory is displayed.
----End
6.3.4 Displaying a Directory or File
You can view a directory or files in the directory.
Context
Do as follows on the switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
cd directory
A directory is specified and the specified directory is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
dir [ /all ] [ filename | flash: ]
The file and sub-directory list in the directory is displayed.
Either the absolute path or relative path is applicable.
----End
6.3.5 Creating a Directory
You can create a directory in the specified directory on a specified storage device.
Context
Do as follows on the switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
cd directory
The parent directory of the directory to be created is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
mkdir directory
The directory is created.
----End
6.3.6 Deleting a Directory
You can delete an unneeded directory.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
6 File System Management
Context
Do as follows on the switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
cd directory
The parent directory of the directory to be deleted is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
rmdir directory
The directory is deleted.
----End
6.4 Managing Files
You can view, create, delete, and rename files.
6.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before managing files, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment, complete the preconfiguration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete the configuration
task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
To view, delete, or rename files on the switch, you need to configure files using the file system.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the file system, complete the following tasks:
l
Powering on the switch
l
Connecting the client with the server correctly
Data Preparation
To configure a file system, you need the following data.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
No.
Data
1
File name to be viewed
2
File name to be deleted
3
File name to be renamed
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
6 File System Management
6.4.2 Displaying Contents of Files
You can view the contents of a file, which are displayed in texts.
Context
Do as follows on the switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
cd directory
The directory of the file is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
more filename
The content of the file is displayed.
----End
6.4.3 Copying Files
You can copy files.
Context
Do as follows on the switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
cd directory
The directory of the file is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
copy source-filename destination-filename
The file is copied.
NOTE
The file to be copied must be larger than 0 bytes. Otherwise, the operation fails.
----End
6.4.4 Moving Files
You can move files to a specified directory.
Context
Do as follows on the switch:
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
6 File System Management
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
cd directory
The directory of the file is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
move source-filename destination-filename
The file is moved.
----End
6.4.5 Renaming Files
You can rename files.
Context
Do as follows on the switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
cd directory
The directory of the file is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
rename source-filename destination-filename
The file is renamed.
----End
6.4.6 Compressing Files
You can compress files to reduce the size of the files.
Context
Do as follows on the switch.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
zip source-filename destination-filename
The file is compressed.
----End
6.4.7 Deleting Files
You can delete unneeded files.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
6 File System Management
Context
Do as follows on the switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
cd directory
The directory of the file is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
delete [ /unreserved ] filename
The file is deleted.
----End
6.4.8 Deleting Files in the Recycle Bin
You can permanently delete files in the recycle bin.
Context
Do as follows on the switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
reset recycle-bin [ filename ]
The file is deleted.
----End
6.4.9 Undeleting Files
You can undelete files.
Context
Do as follows on the switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
undelete filename
The deleted file is recovered.
NOTE
l If the current directory is not the parent directory, you must operate the file by using the absolute path.
l If you use the parameter [ /unreserved ] in the delete command, the file cannot be restored after being
deleted.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
6 File System Management
6.4.10 Running Files in Batch
You can upload the files and then process the files in batches.
Prerequisite
Uploading the batched files on the client end to the switch.
Context
When the batch file is created, you can run the batch file to implement routine tasks
automatically.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
execute filename
The batched file is executed.
----End
6.4.11 Configuring Prompt Modes
The system displays prompts or warning messages when you operate the device. If you need to
change the prompt mode for file operations, you can configure the prompt mode of the file
system.
Prerequisite
Before configuring a file system, complete the following tasks:
l
Powering on the switch
l
Logging in to the switchfrom the client end
Context
The data may be lost or damaged during the process, and the prompt is required.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
file prompt { alert | quiet }
The prompt mode of the file system is configured.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
6 File System Management
By default, the prompt mode is alert.
CAUTION
If the prompt is in the quiet mode, no prompt appears for data lossdue to maloperation.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
81
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
7
7 Management of Configuration Files
Management of Configuration Files
About This Chapter
This chapter describes current configurations, configuration files, detection of master/slave
configuration consistency, and configuration recovery.
7.1 Management of Configuration Files Introduction
The configuration file is the add-in configuration item when restarting the switch this time or
next time.
7.2 Managing Configuration Files
You can manage configuration files to ensure that the switch starts normally.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
7 Management of Configuration Files
7.1 Management of Configuration Files Introduction
The configuration file is the add-in configuration item when restarting the switch this time or
next time.
7.1.1 Configuration Files
This part describes basic concepts of configuration files.
The configuration file is the add-in configuration item when restarting the switch this time or
next time.
NOTE
l Before loading the configuration file to V200R006C00, check whether the configuration file contains
the preceding message. If not, the system processes the configuration file in the same way as earlier
configuration file. In this case, some configurations may not function properly.
The configuration file is a text file in the following formats:
l
The configuration file of V200R006C00 must begin with the message like "!Software
Version V200R006C00."
l
It is saved in the command format.
l
To save space, default parameters are not saved. For the default values of the configuration
parameters, see following sections.
l
Commands are organized on the basis of the command view. All commands of the identical
command view are grouped into a section. Every two command sections are separated by
one or several blank lines or comment lines (beginning with "#").
l
The sequence of command sections is global configuration, logic interface configuration,
physical interface configuration, routing protocol configuration and so on.
NOTE
l The system can run the command with the maximum length of 512 characters, including the command
in an incomplete form.
l If the configuration is in the incomplete form, the command is saved in complete form. Therefore, the
command length in the configuration file may exceed 512 characters. When the system restarts, these
commands cannot be restored.
7.1.2 Configuration Files and Current Configurations
The part describes basic concepts of configuration files and current configurations.
l
Initial configurations: On powering on, the switch retrieves the configuration files from a
default save path to initiate itself. If configuration files do not exist in the default save path,
the switch uses the default parameters.
l
Current configurations: indicates the effective configurations of the currently running
switch.
l
Users can modify the current configurations of the switch through the command line
interface. Use the save command to save the current configuration to the configuration file
of the default storage devices, and the current configuration becomes the initial
configuration of the switch when the switch is powered on next time.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
7 Management of Configuration Files
7.2 Managing Configuration Files
You can manage configuration files to ensure that the switch starts normally.
7.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before managing configuration files, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete
the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
In one of the following situations, you need to manage configuration files:
l
To start the switch normally, you need to select the correct S5700 system software and
configuration file for the switch to load.
l
After modifying current configurations, you need to save the modified contents.
l
You need to view the configuration of the switch.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before managing configuration files, complete the following task:
l
Installing the switch and starting it properly
Data Preparation
To manage configuration files, you need the following data.
No.
Data
1
S5700 System software and its file name
2
Configuration file and its name
3
The number of the start line from which the comparison of the configuration files
begins
7.2.2 Configuring System Software for a switch to Load for the Next
Startup
To upgrade the system software of a switch, you can specify the S5700 system software to be
loaded for the next startup.
Context
Do as follows on the switch:
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
7 Management of Configuration Files
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
startup system-software system-file [ slave-board ]
The S5700 system software for the switch to load next time when it starts is configured.
The system software package must use .cc as the extension and be saved to the root directory of
the flash memory.
If the BootROM version of next startup software that you specify is different from the current
BootROM version, the system prompts you to upgrade the BootRom.
----End
7.2.3 Configuring the Configuration File for Switch to Load for the
Next Startup
Before restarting a switch, you can specify the configuration files that are loaded for the next
startup.
Context
Do as follows on the switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
startup saved-configuration configuration-file
Configuration file is saved for the switch to load next time on startup.
The filename extension of the configuration file must be .cfg or .zip, and must be stored in the
root directory of a storage device.
When the switch turns on, it initiates by reading the configuration file from the flash memory
by default. Thus, the configuration in this configuration file is called initial configuration. If no
configuration file is saved in the flash, the switch initiates with default parameters.
The effective configuration when a switch is working is called current configuration.
----End
7.2.4 Saving Configuration File
The system can save the configuration files in real-time to prevent data loss when the switch is
powered off or accidentally restarted.
Procedure
l
Run:
save [ all ] [ configuration-file ]
The current configurations are saved.
The filename extension of the configuration file must be .cfg or .zip. The system startup
configuration file must be saved in the root directory of a storage device.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
7 Management of Configuration Files
The user can modify the current configuration through the command line interface. To set
the current configuration as initial configuration when the switch starts next time, you can
use the save command to save the current configuration in the flash memory.
You can use the save all command to save all the current configurations, including the
configurations of the boards that are not inserted, to the default directory.
NOTE
When saving the configuration file for the first time, if you do not specify the optional parameter
configuration-file, the switch asks you whether to save the file as "vrpcfg.zip" or not.
----End
7.2.5 Clearing a Configuration File
You can clear the configuration file that has been loaded to a device.
Context
The configuration file stored in the flash memory needs to be cleared in the following cases:
l
The system software does not match the configuration file after the switch has been
upgraded.
l
The configuration file is destroyed or an incorrect configuration file has been loaded.
l
Clear the currently loaded configuration file.
Procedure
Run the reset saved-configuration command to clear the currently loaded configuration
file.
– If the configuration file of the switch used for the current startup is the same as that used
for the next startup, running the reset saved-configuration command will clear both
the configuration files. The switch will uses the default configuration file for the next
startup.
– If the configuration file of the switch used for the current startup is different from that
used at the next startup, running the reset saved-configuration command will clear the
configuration file used for the current startup.
– If the configuration file of the switch used for the current startup is empty, the system
will prompt you that the configuration file does not exist after you run the reset savedconfiguration command.
If you do not run the startup saved-configuration configuration-file command to specify
a new correct configuration file, or do not run the save command to save the configuration
file after the configuration file is cleared, the switch will use the default configuration file
at the next startup.
----End
7.2.6 Comparing Configuration Files
You can compare the current configuration with the initial configuration.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
7 Management of Configuration Files
Context
Do as follows on the switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
compare configuration [ configuration-file ] [ current-line-number save-linenumber ]
The current configuration is compared with the configuration file for next startup.
If no parameter is set, the comparison begins with the first lines of configuration files. currentline-number and save-line-number are used to continue the comparison by ignoring the
differences between the configuration files.
When comparing differences between the configuration files, the system displays the contents
of the current configuration file and saved configuration file from the first different line. By
default, 150 characters are displayed for each configuration file. If the number of characters from
the first different line to the end is less than 150, the contents after the first different line are all
displayed.
In comparing the current configurations with the configuration file for next startup, if the
configuration file for next startup is unavailable or its contents are null, the system prompts that
reading files fails.
----End
7.2.7 Checking the Configuration
After managing configuration files, you can view the current configuration files, configuration
files for the next startup, information about files for device startup, and files in the storage device.
Prerequisite
The configuration of Managing Configuration Files are complete.
Procedure
l
Run the display current-configuration command to check current configuration files.
l
Run the display saved-configuration [ last ] command to check the configuration file that
the switch loads the next time when it starts.
l
Run the display startup command to check the file information used by the device upon
start.
l
Run the dir [ /all ] [ filename ] command to check check the file information in storage
device.
----End
Example
After the configurations succeed, run the preceding commands, and you can find the following
results:
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
The current configuration of the switch is correct without any redundant configuration.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
7 Management of Configuration Files
l
The current configuration of the switch is saved in the storage device.
l
The S5700 system software and configuration file that are to be loaded on the switch next
time are correct and they are saved in the root directory of the storage device.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
8
FTP and TFTP
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the fundamentals, configuration procedures and configuration examples
of FTP and TFTP.
8.1 FTP and TFTP Introduction
This section describes the basic concepts of FTP and TFTP.
8.2 Configuring the Switch to be the FTP Server
After a switch is configured with basic functions of the FTP server, you can run the FTP client
application to log in to the switch, and then access files on the switch.
8.3 Configuring FTP ACL
You can configure the FTP ACL on a switch to allow only specified users to log in to the
switch.
8.4 Configuring the Switch to Be the FTP Client
You can configure a switch to be an FTP client and then log in to the FTP server.
8.5 Configuring the Switch to Be the TFTP Client
You can configure a switch to be an FTP client and then log in to the FTP server.
8.6 Limiting the Access to the TFTP Server
You can configure the maximum number of TFTP servers that a TFTP client can access to
determine which TFTP servers the TFTP client can log in to.
8.7 Configuration Examples
This section provides several configuration examples for FTP and TFTP together with the
configuration flowchart. The configuration examples explain networking requirements,
configuration notes, and configuration roadmap.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
8.1 FTP and TFTP Introduction
This section describes the basic concepts of FTP and TFTP.
8.1.1 FTP
You can transfer files between local and remote hosts through FTP. FTP is commonly used in
version upgrade, log downloading, file transfer, and configuration saving.
File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is an application layer protocol in the TCP/IP protocol suite. It
implements file transfer between local and remote hosts based on related file systems. The FTP
protocol is implemented based on corresponding file system.
The switch provides the following FTP services:
l
FTP server service. Users can run the FTP client program to log in to the switch and access
the files on the switch.
l
FTP client service. Users can establish a connection with the switch by running a terminal
emulation program or a Telnet program on a PC. Enter an FTP command to connect with
the remote FTP server and access the files on the remote host.
8.1.2 TFTP
TFTP does not have a complex interactive access interface and authentication control. TFTP is
applicable when there is no complex interaction between the client and server.
The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) is a simple file transfer protocol.
Compared with FTP, TFTP does not have a complex interactive access interface and
authentication control. TFTP is applicable in an environment where there is no complex
interaction between the client and the server. For example, TFTP is used to obtain the memory
image of the system when the system starts up.
TFTP is implemented based on the User Datagram Protocol (UDP).
The client initiates the TFTP transfer. To download files, the client sends a read request packet
to the TFTP server, receives packets from the server, and sends acknowledgement to the server.
To upload files, the client sends a write request packet to the TFTP server, sends packets to the
server, and receives acknowledgement from the server.
TFTP transfers the files in two formats:
l
The binary format: transfers program files.
l
The ASCII format: transfers text files.
At present, the S5700 serves only as the TFTP client and transfers files in the binary format.
8.2 Configuring the Switch to be the FTP Server
After a switch is configured with basic functions of the FTP server, you can run the FTP client
application to log in to the switch, and then access files on the switch.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
8.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring a switch to be the FTP server, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help
you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
When the switch serves as the FTP server, after the client logs in to the switch through FTP, the
user can transfer files between the client and the server.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the switch as the FTP server, complete the following tasks:
l
Powering on the switch
l
Connecting the FTP client to the server
Data Preparation
To configure the switch as the FTP server, you need the following data.
NOTE
For FTP secure server connection, perform step 2.
No.
Data
1
(Optional) Listening port number specified on the FTP server
2
(Optional) Timeout period of the disconnection from the FTP server
3
FTP username and password
4
File directory authorized to the FTP user
8.2.2 (Optional) Specifying a Port Number for the FTP Server
You can configure or change the monitoring port number of the FTP server. After the port
number is changed, only the user knows the current port number, which guarantees the security.
Context
If the FTP is not enabled, change the FTP port as required.
If the FTP service is enabled, run the undo ftp server command to disable the FTP service, and
then change the FTP port.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ftp [ ipv6 ] server port port-number
The port number of the FTP server is configured.
If a new number of a monitored port is configured, the FTP server interrupts all the FTP
connections and monitors the port of the new number. By default, the number of the port
monitored by the FTP server is 21.
----End
8.2.3 Enabling the FTP Server
This section describes how to enable FTP server.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ftp [ ipv6 ] server enable
The FTP server is enabled.
NOTE
When the file operation between clients and the switch ends, run the undo ftp [ ipv6 ] server command
to disable the FTP server function. This ensures the security of the switch.
----End
8.2.4 (Optional) Configuring the Timeout Period
This section describes how to configure the timeout period of the FTP server.
Context
If the client is idle for the configured time, the connection is removed from the FTP server.
By default, the timeout value is 10 minutes.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ftp timeout minutes
The timeout period of the FTP server is configured.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
92
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
8.2.5 Configuring the Local Username and the Password
You can configure the authentication information for FTP users, which prevents unauthorized
users from performing operations on the device and thus guarantees the security.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as the FTP server:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
aaa
The AAA view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
local-user user-name password { simple | cipher } password
The local username and the password are configured.
----End
8.2.6 Configuring the Service Type and Authorization Information
You can configure the authorization mode and authorization directory for FTP users. In this
case, unauthorized users cannot access the restricted directory, which guarantees the security.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as the FTP server:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 (Optional) Run:
set default ftp-directory directory
The default FTP working directory is configured.
Step 3 Run:
aaa
The AAA view is displayed.
Step 4 Run:
local-user user-name service-type ftp
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
The FTP service type is configured.
Step 5 Run:
local-user user-name ftp-directory directory
The authorization directory about the FTP user is configured.
----End
8.2.7 Checking the Configuration
After configuring a switch to be the FTP server, you can view the configuration and status of
the FTP server as well as information about login FTP users.
Prerequisite
The configuration of the Switch to be the FTP Server are complete.
Procedure
l
Run the display [ ipv6 ] ftp-server the configuration and running information about the
FTP server.
l
Run the display ftp-users command to check the login FTP user.
----End
Example
After configuring the FTP server, run the display [ ipv6 ] ftp-server command. You can view
that the parameters of the current FTP server.
<Quidway> display ftp-server
FTP server is running
Max user number
User count
Timeout value(in minute)
Listening Port
Acl number
5
0
30
1080
0
Run the display ftp-users command to view the user name, port number, authorization directory
of the FTP user configured presently.
<Quidway> display ftp-users
username host
zll
100.2.150.226
port
1383
idle
3
topdir
flash:
8.3 Configuring FTP ACL
You can configure the FTP ACL on a switch to allow only specified users to log in to the
switch.
8.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring the FTP ACL, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete
the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
94
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
Applicable Environment
When the switch serves as the FTP server, for security, you can configure the switch by the
access control list (ACL) to be accessed by only those clients that meet the matching conditions.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the FTP ACL, complete the following tasks:
l
Powering on the switch
l
Connecting the FTP client with the server
Data Preparation
To configure the FTP ACL, you need the following data.
No.
Data
1
ACL number
8.3.2 Enabling the FTP Server
The FTP server is disabled by default. You need to enable the FTP server before using FTP
functions.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as the FTP server:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ftp [ ipv6 ] server enable
The FTP server is started.
----End
8.3.3 Configuring a Basic ACL
You can configure a basic ACL and define rules by specifying the source IP address.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as the FTP server:
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
95
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
acl acl-number
The ACL view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
rule [ rule-id ] { deny | permit } [ fragment | logging | source { source-address
source-wildcard | any } | time-range time-name ] *
The ACL rule is configured.
NOTE
FTP supports only the basic ACL.
----End
8.3.4 Configuring the Basic FTP ACL
You can configure the basic FTP ACL.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as the FTP server:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ftp [ ipv6 ] acl acl-number
The basic FTP ACL is configured.
----End
8.3.5 Checking the Configuration
After configuring the FTP ACL, you can view the configuration and status of the FTP server as
well as information about login FTP users.
Prerequisite
The configuration of FTP ACL are complete.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
96
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
Procedure
l
Run the display ftp-server [ ] command to check the configuration and status of the FTP
server.
----End
Example
After configuring an FTP server, you can run the display ftp-server command and view that
the ACL number allocated for the FTP server is 2345.
<Quidway> display ftp-server
FTP server is running
Max user number
User count
Timeout value(in minute)
Listening Port
Acl number
SSL security status
5
0
30
1080
2345
Disabled
8.4 Configuring the Switch to Be the FTP Client
You can configure a switch to be an FTP client and then log in to the FTP server.
8.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring a switch to be an FTP client, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help
you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
When a switch serves as an FTP client, you can log in to the FTP server through the switch and
then transmit files or manage server directory.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the switch as an FTP client, complete the following tasks:
l
Powering on the switch
l
Connecting the FTP client to the server
Data Preparation
To configure the switch as an FTP client, you need the following data.
NOTE
For FTP secure server connection, perform step 2, 3 and 4.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
No.
Data
1
Host name or IP address of the FTP server
2
Port number of connecting FTP
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
97
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
No.
Data
3
FTP protocol command
4
Local file name and file name on the remote FTP server
5
Working directory name of the remote FTP server, local working directory of the
FTP client, or directory name of the remote FTP server
6
Login username and password
8.4.2 Logging In to the FTP Server
You can log in to the FTP server in the user view or the FTP view.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as the client:
Procedure
Step 1 Run the following commands according to types of the server IP address.
l If the IP address of the server is an IPv4 address, do as follows:
– In the user view, establish a connection to the FTP server.
Run:
ftp [ host [ port-number ] [ public-net | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] ]
The switch is connected to the FTP server.
– In the FTP view, establish a connection to the FTP server.
1.
Run:
ftp
The FTP view is displayed.
2.
Run:
open host [ port-number ] [ public-net | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ]
The switch is connected to the FTP server.
NOTE
Before logging in to the FTP server, you can run the set net-manager vpn-instance
command to configure a default VPN instance. After that, the default VPN instance is used
in the FTP operation.
l If the IP address of the server is an IPv6 address, do as follows:
– In the user view, establish a connection to the FTP server.
Run:
ftp ipv6 host [ port-number ]
The switch is connected to the FTP server.
– In the FTP view, establish a connection to the FTP server.
1.
Run:
ftp
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
98
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
The FTP view is displayed.
2.
Run:
open ipv6 host [ port-number ]
The switch is connected to the FTP server.
----End
8.4.3 Configuring Data Type and Transmission Mode for the File
This section describes how to configure the data type and transmission mode for the file.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as the client:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
ascii | binary
The data type of the file to be transmitted is ascii or binary mode.
NOTE
FTP server supports ascii mode for data transmission. But in Quidway S5700 Series, user has to switch to binary
mode for data transfer.
Step 2 Run:
passive
The passive file transfer mode is configured.
Step 3 Run:
verbose
The verbose mode for FTP is enabled.
When verbose is enabled, all FTP responses are displayed. After file transmission, the statistics
about transmission efficiency will be displayed.
----End
8.4.4 (Optional) Viewing Online Help of the FTP Command
This section describes how to view the online help of the FTP command.
Context
This configuration provides help information for protocol commands.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
remotehelp command
The online help of the FTP command is displayed.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
99
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
8.4.5 Uploading or Downloading Files
You can upload local files to a remote FTP server, download files of the FTP server, and save
the files on the local device.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as the client:
Procedure
Step 1 Upload or download files.
l Run:
put local-filename [ remote-filename ]
The local file is uploaded to the remote FTP server.
l Run:
get remote-filename [ local-filename ]
The FTP file is downloaded from the FTP server and saved to the local file.
----End
8.4.6 Managing Directories
You can perform management operations, such as creating and deleting directories, on the FTP
server.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as the client:
Procedure
Step 1 Run one or more commands in the following order to manage directories.
l Run:
cd pathname
The working path of the remote FTP server is specified.
l Run:
cdup
The working path of the FTP server is switched to the upper-level directory.
l Run:
pwd
The specified directory of the FTP server is displayed.
l Run:
lcd [ local-directory ]
The directory of the FTP client is displayed or changed.
l Run:
mkdir remote-directory
A directory is created on the FTP server.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
l Run:
rmdir remote-directory
A directory is removed from the FTP server.
NOTE
l The directory to be created can comprise letters and digits, but not special characters such as <,
>, ?, \ and :.
l When running the mkdir /abc command, you create a sub-directory named "abc".
----End
8.4.7 Managing Files
You can view a specified directory or file on the remote FTP server or delete a specified file
from the FTP server.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as the client:
Procedure
Step 1 Run one or more commands in the following to manage directories.
l Run:
ls [ remote-filename ] [ local-filename ]
The specified directory or file on the remote FTP server is displayed.
If the directory name is not specified when a specific remote file is selected, the system
searches the working directory for the specific file.
l Run:
dir [ remote-filename ] [ local-filename ]
The specified directory or file on the local FTP server is displayed.
If the directory name is not specified when a specific remote file is selected, the system
searches the working directory for the specific file.
l Run:
delete remote-filename
The specified file on the FTP server is deleted.
If the directory name is not specified when a specific remote file is selected, the system
searches the working directory for the specific file.
When local-filename is set, related information about the file can be downloaded locally.
----End
8.4.8 (Optional) Changing Login Users
This section describes how to change the username and password for remote login.
Prerequisite
This configuration must be performed in FTP view.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
Context
The username and password are of string data type. The string length for username must be in
the range of 1 to 85 case-insensitive characters and password must be in the range of 1 to 16
case-insensitive characters.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
user username [ password ]
The current login user is changed and the user logs in again.
----End
8.4.9 Disconnecting from the FTP Server
This section describes how the client switch disconnects from FTP server.
Prerequisite
The configurations must be performed in the FTP view.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
bye
or
quit
The client switch is disconnected from the FTP server.
Return to the user view.
Step 2 Run:
close
or
disconnect
The client switch is disconnected from the FTP server.
This command terminates the FTP session.
----End
8.5 Configuring the Switch to Be the TFTP Client
You can configure a switch to be an FTP client and then log in to the FTP server.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
8.5.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring TFTP, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment, complete the
pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete the
configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
You can transfer files through TFTP between the server and the client in a simple interaction
environment.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring TFTP, complete the following tasks:
l
Powering on the switch
l
Connecting the TFTP client with the server
Data Preparation
To configure TFTP, you need the following data.
No.
Data
1
IP address of the TFTP server
2
Name of the specific file in the TFTP server
3
File directory
8.5.2 (Optional) Configuring a Source IP Address for a TFTP Client
You can configure a source IP address for a TFTP client. Then, you can set up a TFTP connection
from the TFTP client to the server through a specific route by using this source IP address.
Context
Do as follows on a switch that functions as a TFTP client.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
tftp client-source { -a source-ip-address | -i interface-type interface-number }
A source IP address of a TFTP client is configured.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
After the configuration, the source IP address of the TFTP client displayed on the TFTP server
must be the same as the configured one.
----End
8.5.3 Downloading Files Through TFTP
You can download files from the TFTP server to the TFTP client.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as the TFTP client:
Procedure
Step 1 Run the following commands according to the type of the server IP addresses.
l The IP address of the server is IPv4 address, run:
tftp [ -a source-ip-address | -i interface-type interface-number ] tftp-server
[ public-net | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] get source-filename
[ destination-filename ]
The switch is configured to download files through TFTP.
l The IP address of the server is IPv6 address, run:
tftp ipv6 [ -a source-ip-address ] tftp-server-ipv6 [ -i interface-type
interface-number ] get source-filename [ destination-filename ]
The switch is configured to download files through TFTP.
----End
8.5.4 Uploading Files Through TFTP
You can upload files from the TFTP client to the TFTP server.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as the TFTP client:
Procedure
Step 1 Run the following commands according to the type of the server IP addresses.
l The IP address of the server is IPv4 address, run:
tftp [ -a source-ip-address | -i interface-type interface-number ] tftp-server
[ public-net | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] put source-filename
[ destination-filename ]
The switch is configured to upload files through TFTP.
l The IP address of the server is IPv6 address, run:
tftp ipv6 [ -a source-ip-address ] tftp-server-ipv6 [ -i interface-type
interface-number ] put source-filename [ destination-filename ]
The switch is configured to upload files through TFTP.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
8.6 Limiting the Access to the TFTP Server
You can configure the maximum number of TFTP servers that a TFTP client can access to
determine which TFTP servers the TFTP client can log in to.
8.6.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring a limit to access TFTP servers, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help
you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
When the switch serves as the TFTP client, you can configure the ACL on the switch. After the
configuration, you can control the TFTP server to which the device can log in through TFTP.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring a limit to access the TFTP server, complete the following tasks:
l
Powering on the switch
l
Connecting the TFTP client to the server
Data Preparation
To configure a limit to access to the TFTP server, you need the following data.
No.
Data
1
IP address of the TFTP server
2
ACL number
8.6.2 Configuring the Basic ACL
You can configure ACL rules.
Context
NOTE
TFTP supports only the basic ACL.
Do as follows on the switch that serves as the TFTP client:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
acl acl-number
The ACL view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
rule [ rule-id ] { deny | permit } [ fragment | logging | source { source-address
source-wildcard | any } | time-range time-name ] *
The ACL rule is configured.
----End
8.6.3 Configuring the Basic TFTP ACL
You can configure the basic TFTP ACL.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as the TFTP client:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 According to the address type of the TFTP server, select and run one of the following two
commands.
l For IPv4 addresses,
Run the tftp-server acl acl-number command. You can use the ACL to limit the access to
the TFTP server.
l For IPv6 addresses,
Run the tftp-server ipv6 acl acl6-number command. You can use the ACL to limit the access
to the TFTP server.
----End
8.7 Configuration Examples
This section provides several configuration examples for FTP and TFTP together with the
configuration flowchart. The configuration examples explain networking requirements,
configuration notes, and configuration roadmap.
8.7.1 Example for Configuring the FTP Server
In this example, a PC connected to a switch logs in to the FTP server by entering the correct
user name and password through FTP, and then downloads files to the memory of the switch.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 8-1, the local PC functions as the FTP client of which the IP address is
10.1.1.1/24.
The Switch acts as the FTP server. VLAN 10 is created on the Switch and
GigabitEthernet0/0/1 is added to VLAN 10. The IP address 10.1.1.2/24 is assigned to VLANIF
10.
The PC uploads files to the Switch.
Figure 8-1 Networking diagram of the Switch functioning as the FTP server
VLAN10
FTP Client FTP Session
PC
Ethernet
FTP Server
L2 Switch
Ethernet
Switch
Switch
Interface
VLANIF interface
IP address
FTP Server
GigabitEthernet0/0/1
VLANIF 10
10.1.1.2/24
Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1.
Set the correct FTP user name and password on the Switch that functions as the FTP server.
2.
Log in to the Switch through FTP from the PC.
3.
Upload files to the FTP server.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l
IP address of the FTP server
l
Name of the FTP user set as u1 and the password set as ftppwd on the server
l
Correct path of the source file on the PC
l
Name of the destination file and position where the destination files are located on the
Switch
Procedure
Step 1 Create VLAN 10 on the Switch and assign the IP address 10.1.1.2/24 to VLANIF 10.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] vlan 10
[Quidway-vlan10] quit
[Quidway] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port hybrid pvid vlan 10
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port hybrid untagged vlan 10
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] quit
[Quidway] interface vlanif 10
[Quidway-Vlanif10] ip address 10.1.1.2 24
Step 2 Start the FTP server on the Switch, and set the FTP user name to u1 and password to ftpwd.
[Quidway] ftp
[Quidway] aaa
[Quidway-aaa]
[Quidway-aaa]
[Quidway-aaa]
[Quidway-aaa]
server enable
local-user u1 password simple ftppwd
local-user u1 service-type ftp
local-user u1 ftp-directory flash:/
return
Step 3 On the PC, initiate a connection to the Switch with the user name u1 and the password
ftppwd.
Use Windows XP on the FTP client to illustrate the preceding operations.
C:\WINDOWS\Desktop> ftp 10.1.1.2
Connected to 10.1.1.2.
220 FTP service ready.
User (10.1.1.1:(none)): u1
331 Password required for u1
Password:
230 User logged in.
ftp>
Step 4 Set the mode of transferring files to binary and the local directory on the PC.
ftp> binary
200 Type set to I.
ftp> lcd c:\temp
Local directory now C:\temp.
Step 5 Upload d006.cc and vrpcfg.cfg to the Switch on the PC.
ftp> put d006.cc d006.cc
200 Port command okay.
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for d006.cc.
ftp> put vrpcfg.cfg vrpcfg.cfg
200 Port command okay.
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for vrpcfg.cfg.
ftp> quit
C:\WINDOWS\Desktop>
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname Quidway
#
FTP server enable
#
vlan batch 10
#
interface Vlanif10
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port hybrid pvid vlan 10
port hybrid untagged vlan 10
#
aaa
local-user u1 password simple ftppwd
local-user u1 ftp-directory flash:/
local-user u1 service-type ftp
#
Return
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
8.7.2 Example for Configuring an ACL of the FTP Server
In this example, an ACL is configured to allow only a certain host to log in to the FTP server.
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 8-2, the IP address of the FTP server is 172.16.104.110/24.
The routes between PC1, PC2, and FTP server are reachable. On the S5700 that functions as the
FTP server, it is required that the FTP server should permit only PC1 with the IP address as
172.16.104.111 to download and upload files through FTP, and PC2 should not connect to the
FTP server after the ACL is configured.
Figure 8-2 Networking diagram for configuring an ACL of the FTP server
FTP Server
172.16.104.110/24
172.16.104.111/24
172.16.105.111/24
PC1
PC2
Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1.
Perform basic configurations on the FTP server.
2.
Configure the ACL on the FTP server.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l
Name of the FTP user set as u1 and password set as huawei on the server
l
Number of the ACL
Procedure
Step 1 Configure basic FTP functions.
For details, see 8.7.1 Example for Configuring the FTP Server.
Step 2 Configure an ACL.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] acl number 2001
[Quidway-acl-basic-2001] rule permit source 172.16.104.111 0.0.0.0
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
[Quidway-acl-basic-2001] quit
Step 3 Configure the ACL supported by the FTP server.
[Quidway] ftp acl 2001
Step 4 Connect PC1 to the FTP server.
This step needs to be performed on the DOS of the PC.
c:\ ftp 172.16.104.110
Connected to 172.16.104.110.
220 FTP service ready.
User (100.2.150.40:(none)):u1
331 Password required for u1
Password:
230 User logged in.
ftp>
Step 5 Connect PC2 to the FTP server.
This step needs to be performed on the DOS of the PC.
c:\ ftp 172.16.104.110
Connected to 172.16.104.110.
Info:Connection was denied by remote host according to ACL!
Connection closed by remote host.
----End
Configuration Files
Configuration file of the FTP server
#
sysname Quidway
#
FTP server enable
FTP acl 2001
#
acl number 2001
rule 5 permit source 172.16.104.111 0
#
vlan batch 10
#
interface Vlanif10
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port hybrid pvid vlan 10
port hybrid untagged vlan 10
#
aaa
authentication-scheme default
authorization-scheme default
accounting-scheme default
domain default
local-user u1 password simple huawei
local-user u1 ftp-directory flash:/
local-user u1 service-type ftp
#
return
8.7.3 Example for Configuring the FTP Client
In this example, a switch is configured to be an FTP client. Then, the switch logs in to the FTP
server and downloads system software and configuration software.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 8-3, the remote server at 10.1.1.2 serves as the FTP server. The Switch and
the FTP server are directly connected and on the same network segment. The Switch has a
reachable route to the FTP server.
The Switch acts as the FTP client. Interfaces ranging from GigabitEthernet0/0/1 to
GigabitEthernet0/0/4 can be used to set up FTP connections and they share the IP address
10.1.1.1.
The Switch downloads files from the FTP server.
Figure 8-3 Networking diagram of the Switch functioning as the FTP client
FTP session
PC
configuration
cable
FTP Client
FTP Server
Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1.
Log in to the FTP server from the FTP client.
2.
Download files from the server to the storage device of the client.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l
IP address of the FTP server
l
Name of the destination file and position where the destination files are located on the
Switch
l
Name of the FTP user set as u1 and the password set as ftppwd on the client
Procedure
Step 1 Enable FTP on the remote FTP server. Add an FTP user named u1 and set the password to
ftppwd.
Step 2 Create VLAN 10 on the Switch and assign the IP address 10.1.1.1 to VLANIF10.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] vlan 10
[Quidway-vlan10] quit
[Quidway] interface gigabitethernet
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] quit
[Quidway] interface gigabitethernet
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/2] port
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/2] port
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/2] quit
[Quidway] interface gigabitethernet
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
0/0/1
hybrid pvid vlan 10
hybrid untagged vlan 10
0/0/2
hybrid pvid vlan 10
hybrid untagged vlan 10
0/0/3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
111
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/3] port hybrid
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/3] port hybrid
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/3] quit
[Quidway] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/4
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/4] port hybrid
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/4] port hybrid
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/4] quit
[Quidway] interface vlanif 10
[Quidway-Vlanif10] ip address 10.1.1.3 24
8 FTP and TFTP
pvid vlan 10
untagged vlan 10
pvid vlan 10
untagged vlan 10
Step 3 On the Switch, initiate a connection to the FTP server with the user name tpuser and the password
ftppwd.
<Quidway> ftp 10.1.1.2
Trying 10.1.1.2 ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected to 10.1.1.2.
220 FTP service ready.
User(10.1.1.2:(none)):u1
331 Password required for u1.
Enter password:
230 User logged in.
[ftp]
Step 4 On the Switch, set the mode of transferring files to binary and the flash directory.
[ftp] binary
200 Type set to I.
[ftp] lcd flash:/
The current local directory is flash:.
Step 5 Download the vrpcfg.cfg file from the remote FTP server on the Switch.
[ftp] get vrpcfg.cfg vrpcfg.cfg
200 Port command okay.
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for vrpcfg.cfg.
226 Transfer complete.
FTP: 9124 byte(s) received in 3.100 second(s) 2.94Kbyte(s)/sec.
[ftp] quit
<Quidway>
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname Quidway
#
vlan batch 10
#
interface Vlanif10
ip address 10.1.1.3 255.255.255.0
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port hybrid pvid vlan 10
port hybrid untagged vlan 10
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2
port hybrid pvid vlan 10
port hybrid untagged vlan 10
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/3
port hybrid pvid vlan 10
port hybrid untagged vlan 10
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/4
port hybrid pvid vlan 10
port hybrid untagged vlan 10
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
#
return
8.7.4 Example for Configuring the TFTP Client
In this example, the TFTP application is run on the TFTP server and the location of the source
file on the server is set. After that, you can upload and download files.
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 8-4, the Switch cannot function as the TFTP server. The remote server at
10.1.1.2 functions as the TFTP server.
The Switch acts as a TFTP client. VLAN 10 is created on the Switch, and
GigabitEthernet0/0/1 is added to VLAN 10. The IP address 10.1.1.1/24 is assigned to VLANIF
10.
The Switch downloads files from the TFTP server.
Figure 8-4 Networking diagram for configuring TFTP
TFTP session
PC
configuration
cable
TFTP Client
TFTP Server
Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1.
Run the TFTP software on the TFTP server and set the position where the source file is
located on the Switch.
2.
Download files through TFTP commands on the Switch.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l
TFTP software installed on the TFTP server
l
Path of the source file on the TFTP server
l
Name of the destination file and position where the destination file is located on the Switch
Procedure
Step 1 Enable TFTP on the remote server to ensure that the TFTP application software is started.
Step 2 Create VLAN 10 on the Switch and assign the IP address 10.1.1.1/24 to VLANIF 10.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] vlan 10
[Quidway-vlan10] quit
[Quidway] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
113
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
8 FTP and TFTP
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port hybrid pvid vlan 10
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port hybrid untagged vlan 10
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] quit
[Quidway] interface vlanif 10
[Quidway-Vlanif10] ip address 10.1.1.1 24
Step 3 On the Switch, initiate a connection to the TFTP server and download the 8031.cc file.
<Quidway> tftp 10.1.1.2 get 8031.cc 8031new.cc
Info: Transfer file in binary mode.
Downloading the file from the remote tftp server, please wait...
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname Quidway
#
vlan batch 10
#
interface Vlanif10
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port hybrid pvid vlan 10
port hybrid untagged vlan 10
#
Return
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
9
Telnet and SSH
About This Chapter
Telnet and SSH can provide a terminal which enables users to remotely log in to and access a
server.
9.1 Telnet and SSH Introduction
This section explains basic concepts of user login by means of Telnet and SSH.
9.2 Configuring Telnet Terminal Services
This section explains how to log in to a switch by means of Telnet and configure the switch.
9.3 Configuring SSH Users
SSH users must be configured to ensure that STelnet or SFTP clients are able to log in to SSH
servers.
9.4 Configuring the SSH Server Function
This section describes how to configure the SSH server. STelnet or SFTP must first be enabled
on the SSH server.
9.5 Configuring the STelnet Client Function
This section describes how to configure the STelnet client. A secure connection between the
client and server can be established through negotiation, and the client will be able to log in to
the server similarly to using Telnet services.
9.6 Configuring the SFTP Client Function
This section explains how to configure the SFTP client. The authentication and bidirectional
data encryption of the SFTP client can be manually configured, which will ensure secure file
transmission on the network.
9.7 Configuring the SCP Client
This section describes how to configure the SCP client. The SCP client sets up a secure
connection with the SCP server so that the client can upload files to the server or download files
from the server.
9.8 Configuration Examples
This section provides configuration examples for Telnet and SSH along with a configuration
flowchart. The configuration examples explain networking requirements, configuration notes,
and configuration roadmap.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
9.1 Telnet and SSH Introduction
This section explains basic concepts of user login by means of Telnet and SSH.
9.1.1 Overview of User Login
You can locally or remotely log in to a switch through the console port, Telnet, or SSH.
To configure, monitor, and maintain the local or remote S5700, you need to configure the user
interface, the user management, and the terminal service.
The user interface provides a login plane. The user management guarantees the login security
and the terminal service provides related processes of login protocol.
The S5700 supports the following login methods:
l
Login through the console port
l
Local or remote login through Telnet or SSH
9.1.2 Telnet Terminal Services
The S5700 provides Telnet services including Telnet server and Telnet client.
Telnet Services
Telnet is an application layer protocol in the TCP/IP protocol suite. It provides remote login and
a virtual terminal service through the network.
The S5700 provides the following Telnet services:
l
Telnet server: You can run the Telnet client program on a PC to log in to the switch,
configure and manage it. The switch acts as a Telnet server.
l
Telnet client: You can run the terminal emulation program or the Telnet client program on
a PC to connect with the switch. With the telnet command, you can log in to other
switchs to configure and manage them. As shown in Figure 9-1, Switch A serves as both
the Telnet server and the Telnet client.
Figure 9-1 Telnet client services
Telnet Session2
Telnet Session 1
Telnet
Server
PC
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
SwitchA
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SwitchB
116
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
9.1.3 SSH Terminal Services
The S5700 supports the basic SSH protocol, client function, SFTP protocol, STelnet protocol
and SCP.
Introduction to SSH
SSH works at the application layer in the TCP/IP protocol suite. SSH provides remote login and
virtual terminal on the network where security is guaranteed. Based on TCP connections, SSH
guarantees security and provides authentication for transmitted information, preventing the
following attacks shown in Figure 9-2:
l
IP spoofing
l
Interception of the password in plain text
l
Denial of Service (DoS)
In the figure, Switch is an S5700.
Figure 9-2 Establishing a local SSH connection between the PC and the S5700
VLAN1
SSH
Client
PC
Telnet Session
Ethernet
SSH
Server
L2 Switch Ethernet
Switch
SSH adopts the client/server model and sets up multiple secure transmission channels. The
Switch, as the SSH server, can be connected to multiple PCs that function as SSH clients. A
Layer 2 switch may exist between the PC and the SSH server. In the actual networking, a route
is required to be reachable between the PC and the Switch.
Advantages of SSH
The applications of SSH include STelnet and SFTP.
Different from Telnet and FTP terminal services, SSH provides secure remote access on the
network without security guaranteed. The advantages of SSH are described as follows:
l
STelnet client functions
There is a potential risk on security for login through Telnet because there is no
authentication and the data transmitted through TCP is in plain text. The insecure access
results in malicious attacks including DoS attacks, IP spoofing attacks, and route spoofing
attacks.
SSH provides secure remote access on an insecure network by supporting the following
functions:
– Supporting Revest-Shamir-Adleman Algorithm (RSA) authentication
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
– Supporting Data Encryption Standard (DES) and 3DES
– Supporting the encrypted transfer of the user name or password
– Supporting the encrypted transfer of interactive data
SSH adopts RSA. After the public key and the private key are generated according to the
encryption principle of the asymmetric encryption system, the following information is
transmitted with security between the SSH client and the SSH server:
– Key
– User name or password
– Interactive data
l
SFTP client functions
SFTP provides the following types of applications:
– By using SFTP, you can securely log in to the S5700 to manage files from the remote
device. In this manner, the security of data transmission is improved when files need to
be transferred during the upgrade of the remote system.
– The S5700 can function as the client to log in to the remote device through FTP to
transfer files with security.
l
SCP client
SCP enables you to log in to the device securely from a remote device to upload or download
files. Data transfer in this mode is much safer for remote system update. In addition, SCP
provides the client function so that a local device can log in to a remote device for secure
data transfer.
Unlike SFTP, SCP simplifies the file transfer process by combing user authentication and
file transfer, thus improving the configuration efficiency.
Setting Up an SSH Connection
The procedure for setting up an SSH connection is as follows:
1.
Negotiating the SSH version
2.
Negotiating the key
3.
Authenticating the user identity
4.
Initiating a session request
5.
Performing the interactive session
9.2 Configuring Telnet Terminal Services
This section explains how to log in to a switch by means of Telnet and configure the switch.
9.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring Telnet terminal services, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help
you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
Applicable Environment
To remotely log in to the switch through the Telnet protocol for maintenance and management,
you need to configure Telnet terminal services.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring Telnet terminal services, complete the following tasks:
l
Ensuring that the switch runs normally
l
Ensuring that the IP addresses of interfaces on the switch are configured correctly
l
Configuring the user account, correct login authentication mode, and call-in and call-out
restriction
l
Ensuring that reachable routes exist between the terminal and the switch
Data Preparation
To configure Telnet terminal services, you need the following data.
No.
Data
1
IP address of the switch
2
Name of the VPN instance
3
IPv4/IPv6 address or host name of the remote switch
4
Number of the TCP port that is used by the remote switch to provide Telnet services
5
(Optional) Timeout period after which the server terminates the connection with the
user interface
6
(Optional) Source IP address or source interface of the device functioning as an Telnet
client
9.2.2 Enabling the Telnet Service
Before establishing a Telnet connection with the server, you need to enable the Telnet service.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as an Telnet server.
Select and perform one of the following two steps for IPv4 or IPv6.
Procedure
l
For the IPv4 network
1.
Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
2.
9 Telnet and SSH
Run:
telnet server enable
The Telnet service is enabled.
NOTE
l By default, the function of the Telnet server is enabled.
l If the undo telnet server enable command is run when Telnet login is in progress, the
command does not take effect.
l After the Telnet server function is disabled, you can log in to the device only through SSH
or an asynchronous serial interface rather than through Telnet.
l
For the IPv6 network
1.
Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2.
Run:
telnet ipv6 server enable
The Telnet service is enabled.
NOTE
l By default, the function of the Telnet server is enabled.
l If the telnet ipv6 server enable command is run when Telnet login is in progress, the
command does not take effect.
l After the Telnet server function is disabled, you can log in to the device only through SSH
or an asynchronous serial interface rather than through Telnet.
----End
9.2.3 Establishing a Telnet Connection
You can log in to and manage a switch through Telnet.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as a Telnet client:
Select and perform one of the following two steps for IPv4 or IPv6.
Procedure
l
Run:
telnet
[ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] host-name [ port-number ]
Log in to the switch and manage other switchs.
l
Run:
telnet ipv6 host-name [ port-number ]
Log in to the switch and manage other switchs.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
120
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
9.2.4 (Optional) Configuring a Telnet Server Port Number
A user can configure or change the Telnet server port number. After the port number is changed,
only the user knows the port number, improving security.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that functions as a Telnet server:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
telnet server port port-number
A Telnet server port number is set.
If a new port number is set, the Telnet server terminates all established Telnet connections, and
then uses the new port number to listen to new requests for Telnet connections. By default, the
Telnet server port number is 23.
----End
9.2.5 (Optional) Scheduled Telnet Disconnection
You can set the idle-timeout period for Telnet connections. In this manner, if the Telnet
connections keep idle during the specified period, the system automatically terminates the Telnet
connections.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as a Telnet client:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
user-interface [ ui-type ] first-ui-number [ last-ui-number ]
The user interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
idle-timeout minutes [ seconds ]
The scheduled Telnet disconnection is enabled.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
121
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
9.2.6 Checking the Configuration
After configuring Telnet terminal services, you can view the connection status of the current
user interface, connection status of each user interface, and status of all established TCP
connections.
Prerequisite
The configuration of Telnet Terminal Services are complete.
Procedure
l
Run the display users command to check information about connected users.
l
Run the display users all command to check information about all users, including
connected and disconnected users.
l
Run the display tcp status command to check TCP connections.
l
Run the display telnet server status command to check the configuration and status of the
Telnet server.
----End
Example
Run the display tcp status command to view TCP connections. In the command output,
Established indicates that a TCP connection has been established.
<Quidway> display tcp status
TCPCB
Tid/Soid
Local Add:port
39952df8
36 /1509
0.0.0.0:0
Closed
32af9074
59 /1
0.0.0.0:21
Listening
34042c80
73 /17
10.164.39.99:23
Established
Foreign Add:port
0.0.0.0:0
VPNID
0
0.0.0.0:0
14849
10.164.6.13:1147
0
State
Run the display telnet server status command to view the configuration and status of the Telnet
server.
<Quidway> display telnet server status
TELNET IPV4 server
TELNET IPV6 server
TELNET server port
:Enable
:Enable
:23
9.3 Configuring SSH Users
SSH users must be configured to ensure that STelnet or SFTP clients are able to log in to SSH
servers.
9.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring SSH users, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment, complete
the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete the
configuration task quickly and accurately.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
122
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
Applicable Environment
The STelnet or SFTP client can log in to the SSH server to perform operations only after SSH
users are correctly configured on the SSH server.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring SSH users, complete the following tasks:
l
Creating a local user
l
Configuring an RSA public key for the SSH client on the SSH server
Data Preparation
To configure SSH users, you need the following data.
No.
Data
1
Name and password of SSH users
2
Authentication mode of SSH users
3
Service type of SSH users
4
Name of the peer RSA public key assigned to SSH users
5
Operating directory of the SFTP service for SSH users
9.3.2 Creating SSH User
AAA does not support RSA authentication. Therefore, when RSA authentication or passwordrsa authentication is adopted, you need to create an SSH user. When password authentication is
adopted, you need to create a local user with the same name in the AAA view.
Context
NOTE
Besides creating an SSH user separately, you can also create an SSH user when you configure the following.
l Configuring the Authentication Mode for SSH Users
l Configuring the Service Type of SSH Users
Do as follows on the switch that serves as an SSH server:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ssh user user-name
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
123
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
If you want to create an SSH user in the password authentication mode, you need to create a
local user with the same name in the AAA view.
1.
Run:
aaa
The AAA view is displayed.
2.
Run:
local-user user-name password { simple | cipher } password
Name and password of the local user are created.
----End
9.3.3 Configuring SSH for the VTY User Interface
You can configure SSH for the VTY user interface.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as an SSH server:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
user-interface [ vty ] first-ui-number [ last-ui-number ]
The VTY user interface is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
authentication-mode aaa
The AAA authentication mode is configured.
Step 4 Run:
protocol inbound ssh
The VTY is configured to support SSH.
NOTE
The authentication mode of the VTY user interface must be set to AAA. Otherwise, the protocol
inbound ssh command cannot be configured successfully.
----End
9.3.4 Generating a Local RSA Key Pair
You need to create an RSA key before configuring SSH.
Context
Do as follows on the switchs that serve as a client or a server:
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
rsa local-key-pair create
A local RSA key pair is generated.
NOTE
To log in to an SSH server, the local RSA key pair must be configured and generated first. Before performing
the other SSH configurations, you must configure the rsa local-key-pair create command to generate a
local key pair.
----End
9.3.5 Configuring the Authentication Mode for SSH Users
You can configure the password or RSA authentication mode for SSH users.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as an SSH server:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ssh user user-name authentication-type { password | rsa | password-rsa | all }
The authentication mode for SSH users is configured.
Perform the following as required:
l Authenticate the SSH user through the password.
– Run:
ssh user user-name authentication-type password
The password authentication is configured for the SSH user.
– Run:
ssh authentication-type default password
The default password authentication is configured for the SSH user.
For the local authentication or HWTACACS authentication, if the number of SSH users
is small, you can adopt the former command; if the number of SSH users is large, adoptthe
later command to simplify the configuration.
l Authenticate the SSH user through RSA.
1.
Run:
ssh user user-name authentication-type rsa
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
125
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
The RSA authentication is configured for the SSH user.
2.
Run:
rsa peer-public-key key-name
The public key view is displayed.
3.
Run:
public-key-code begin
The public key editing view is displayed.
4.
Run:
hex-data
The public key is edited.
The public key must be a string of hexadecimal alphanumeric characters. It is automatically
generated by an SSH client. You can run the display rsa local-key-pair public command
to view a generated public key.
5.
Run:
public-key-code end
Quit the public key editing view.
If the specified hex-data is invalid, the public key cannot be generated after the peer-publickey end command is run; If the specified key-name is deleted in other views, the system
prompts that the key does not exist after the peer-public-key end command is run and the
system view is displayed.
6.
Run:
peer-public-key end
Return to the system view from the public key view.
7.
Run:
ssh user user-name assign rsa-key key-name
The public key is assigned to the SSH user.
NOTE
l After the public key editing view is displayed, the RSA public key generated on the client can be sent
to the server. Copy the RSA public key to the switch that serves as the SSH server.
l Before the peer RSA public key is assigned to the SSH users, the SSH server must be configured and
the peer RSA public key must be the RSA public key of the SSH client.
----End
9.3.6 (Optional) Configuring the Basic Authentication Information
for SSH Users
You can configure the interval for updating the server key pair, timeout period of the SSH
authentication, and retry times of the SSH authentication.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as an SSH server:
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
126
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ssh server rekey-interval interval
The interval for updating the server key pair is configured.
By default, the interval for updating the key pair of the SSH server is 0 that indicates no updating.
Step 3 Run:
ssh server timeout seconds
The timeout period of the SSH authentication is set.
By default, the timeout period is 60 seconds.
Step 4 Run:
ssh server authentication-retries times
The number of retry times of the SSH authentication is set.
By default, the retry times is 3.
----End
9.3.7 (Optional) Authorizing SSH Users Through the Command
Line
If RSA authentication is adopted, you need to configure command line authorization for SSH
users.
Context
NOTE
There are four authentication modes for an SSH user, namely, password, rsa, password-rsa, and all. For
details of the configuration of the command line authorization for password authentication, refer to the
chapter "AAA and User Management" in the Quidway S5700 Series Configuration Guide - Security. This
section describes how to configure the command line authorization for RSA authentication.
Do as follows on the switch that serves as an SSH server:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ssh user user-name authorization-cmd aaa
The command line authorization is configured for the specified SSH user.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
127
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
Follow-up Procedure
After configuring the authorization through command lines for the SSH user to perform RSA
authentication, you have to configure the AAA authorization. Otherwise, the command line
authorization for the SSH user does not take effect.
9.3.8 Configuring the Service Type of SSH Users
You can set the service type of SSH users to SFTP, STelnet, or all.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that functions as an SSH server:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ssh user username service-type { sftp | stelnet | all }
The service type for the SSH user is configured.
By default, the service type of the SSH user is not configured.
----End
9.3.9 (Optional) Configuring the Authorized Directory of the SFTP
Service for SSH Users
You can configure a directory as an authorized directory to allow SSH users to use SFTP services.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as an SSH server:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ssh user username sftp-directory directoryname
The authorized directory of the SFTP service for SSH users is configured.
By default, the authorized directory of the SFTP service for SSH users is Flash.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
128
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
9.3.10 Checking the Configuration
After configuring SSH users, you can view SSH user information.
Prerequisite
The configuration of SSH Users are complete.
Procedure
l
Run the display ssh user-information command to check the information about the SSH
client on the SSH server.
l
Run the display ssh user-information username command to check the information about
the specified SSH client on the SSH server.
----End
Example
Run the display ssh user-information username command. It shows that the SSH user named
clinet001 is authenticated by password, and its service type is sftp.
[Quidway] display ssh user-information client001
User Name
: client001
Authentication-type
: password
User-public-key-name
: Sftp-directory
: Service-type
: sftp
Authorization-cmd
: No
9.4 Configuring the SSH Server Function
This section describes how to configure the SSH server. STelnet or SFTP must first be enabled
on the SSH server.
9.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring the SSH server, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete
the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
Before configuring the SSH server, you must enable STelnet, SFTP, or SCP on the SSH server.
You can change the number of the port monitored by the SSH server to other port numbers. This
can prevent attackers from accessing standard ports of the SSH server and thus save bandwidth
and system resources.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the SSH server, complete the following tasks:
l
Connecting the SSH client to the SSH server correctly
l
Ensuring that the SSH client and the SSH server are routable
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
l
Configuring the VTY interface on the SSH server to support SSH
l
Configuring the SSH client on the SSH server
l
Creating the local RSA key pair on the SSH server
9 Telnet and SSH
Data Preparation
To configure the SSH server, you need the following data.
No.
Data
1
Number of the port monitored by the SSH server
9.4.2 Enabling the STelnet Service
Before enjoying the STelnet service, you need to enable it.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as an SSH server:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
stelnet server enable
The STelnet service is enabled.
By default, STelnet services are disabled.
----End
9.4.3 Enabling the SFTP Service
Before enjoying the STelnet service, you need to enable it.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as an SSH server:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
sftp server enable
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
The SFTP service is enabled.
By default, the SFTP service is disabled.
----End
9.4.4 Enabling SCP Services
SCP services become available only after being enabled.
Context
Do as follows on the S5700 functioning as the SCP server:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
scp server enable
SCP services are enabled.
By default, SCP services are disabled.
----End
9.4.5 (Optional) Enabling the Earlier Version - Compatible Function
You can configure whether SSH of earlier versions are compatible.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as an SSH server:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ssh server compatible-ssh1x enable
The earlier version-compatible function is enabled.
By default, the server configured with the SSH2.0 protocol is compatible with the server
configured with SSH1.X. If the client of SSH1.3 to SSH1.99 (protocol version ranges from 1.3
to 1.99) is denied access to log in, you can run the undo ssh server compatible-ssh1x enable
command to disable the switch to be compatible with the earlier protocol version.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
NOTE
l Compared with SSH1.X, SSH2.0 is extended in structure to more authentication modes and key
exchange modes with higher service capability, such as SFTP.
l The S5700 supports the SSH protocol of version 1.3 to version 2.0.
----End
9.4.6 (Optional) Configuring the Number of the Port Monitored by
the SSH Server
You can configure or change the monitoring port number of the SSH server. After the port
number is changed, only the user knows the current port number, which guarantees the security.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as an SSH server:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ssh server port port-number
The number of the port monitored by the SSH server is configured.
If a new number of a monitored port is configured, the SSH server interrupts all the STelnet and
SFTP connections and monitors the port of the new number. By default, the number of the port
monitored by the SSH server is 22.
----End
9.4.7 (Optional) Configuring the Interval for Updating the Key Pair
on the SSH Server
You can configure the interval for updating the key pair of the SSH server, which can guarantee
the security.
Context
Do as follows on the switch that serves as an SSH server:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ssh server rekey-interval interval
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
The interval for updating the key pair is set.
By default, the interval for updating the key pair of the SSH server is 0, which means that the
key pair is never updated.
----End
9.4.8 Checking the Configuration
After configuring the SSH server, you can view the global configuration of the SSH server.
Prerequisite
The configurations of the SSH server are complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display ssh server status command to view the global configuration of the SSH server.
----End
Example
Run the display ssh server status command, and you can view that the SSH version of the SSH
session is 1.99, and the times for re-establishing the SSH session is 5.
<Quidway> display ssh server status
SSH version
SSH connection timeout
SSH server key generating interval
SSH Authentication retries
SFTP server
Stelnet server
Scp server
SSH server port
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
1.99
60 seconds
2 hours
5 times
Enable
Enable
Enable
55535
NOTE
If the number of the monitored port is the default number, information about the currently monitored port
will not be displayed.
9.5 Configuring the STelnet Client Function
This section describes how to configure the STelnet client. A secure connection between the
client and server can be established through negotiation, and the client will be able to log in to
the server similarly to using Telnet services.
9.5.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring an STelnet client, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete
the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
STelnet is a secure Telnet protocol. The SSH user can use the STelnet service in the same manner
as using the Telnet service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
133
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before connecting the STelnet client to the SSH server, complete the following tasks:
l
Generating the local RSA key pair on the SSH server
l
Configuring the STelnet user on the SSH server
l
Enabling the STelnet service on the SSH server
Data Preparation
To connect the STelnet client to the SSH server, you need the following data:
No.
Data
1
Name of the SSH server
2
Number of the port monitored by the SSH server
3
Preferred encrypted algorithm from the STelnet client to the SSH server
4
Preferred encrypted algorithm from the SSH server to the STelnet client
5
Preferred HMAC algorithm from the STelnet client to the SSH server
6
Preferred HMAC algorithm from the SSH server to the STelnet client
7
Preferred algorithm of key exchange
8
Name of the outgoing interface
9
Source address
9.5.2 Enabling the First-Time Authentication on the SSH Client
After the first-time authentication on the SSH client is enabled, the STelnet client does not check
the validity of the RSA public key when logging in to the SSH server for the first time.
Context
If the first-time authentication on the SSH client is enabled, the STelnet client does not check
the validity of the RSA public key when logging in to the SSH server for the first time. After
the login, the system automatically allocates the RSA public key and saves it for authentication
in next login.
To simplify user operations, you are recommended to enable the first-time authentication on the
SSH client.
Do as follows on the switch that serves as an SSH client:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
134
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ssh client first-time enable
The first-time authentication on the SSH client is enabled.
By default, the first-time authentication on the SSH client is disabled.
NOTE
l The purpose of enabling the first-time authentication on the SSH client is to skip checking the validity
of the RSA public key of the SSH server when the STelnet client logs in to the SSH server for the first
time. The check is skipped because the STelnet server has not saved the RSA public key of the SSH
server.
l If the first-time authentication is not enabled on the SSH client, when the STelnet client logs in to the
SSH server for the first time, the STelnet client fails to pass the check on the RSA public key validity
and cannot log in to the server.
TIP
To ensure that the STelnet client can log in to the SSH server at the first attempt, you can assign the RSA
public key in advance to the SSH server on the SSH client in addition to enabling the first-time
authentication on the SSH client.
----End
9.5.3 (Optional) Assigning an RSA Public Key to the SSH Server
You can assign an RSA public key to the SSH server.
Context
If the first-time authentication on the SSH client is disabled, you need to allocate an RSA public
key to the SSH server before the STelnet client logs in to the SSH server.
Do as follows on the switch that serves as an SSH client:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
rsa peer-public-key key-name
The public key view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
public-key-code begin
The public key editing view is displayed.
Step 4 Run:
hex-data
The public key is edited.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
135
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
The public key must be a string of hexadecimal alphanumeric characters. It is automatically
generated by an SSH client. You can run the display rsa local-key-pair public command to
view a generated public key.
Step 5 Run:
public-key-code end
Quit the public key editing view.
If the specified hex-data is invalid, the public key cannot be generated after the peer-publickey end command is run; If the specified key-name is deleted in other views, the system prompts
that the key does not exist after the peer-public-key end command is run and the system view
is displayed.
Step 6 Run:
peer-public-key end
Return to the system view from the public key view.
Step 7 Run:
ssh client servername assign rsa-key keyname
The RSA public key is assigned to the SSH server.
NOTE
l Before being assigned to the SSH server, the assigned peer RSA public key must be obtained from the
SSH server and must be configured on the SSH client. Then, the STelnet client client can successfully
undergo the validity check on the RSA public key of the SSH server.
l If the RSA public key stored on the SSH client becomes invalid, run the undo ssh client servername
assign rsa-key command to cancel the association between the SSH client and the SSH server. Then,
run the ssh client servername assign rsa-key keyname command to allocate a new RSA public key to
the SSH server.
----End
9.5.4 Enabling the STelnet Client
You can log in to the SSH server from the SSH client through STelnet.
Context
NOTE
When accessing an SSH server, the STelnet client can carry the source address and the VPN instance name
and choose the key exchange algorithm, encryption algorithm, or HMAC algorithm, and configure the
keepalive function..
Do as follows on the switch that serves as an SSH client:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 According to the address type of the SSH server, select and run one of the following two
commands.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
136
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
l For IPv4 addresses,
Run the stelnet host-ipv4 [ port ] [ [ -vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] | [ prefer_kex
{ dh_group1 | dh_exchange_group } ] | [ prefer_ctos_cipher { des | 3des | aes128 } ] |
[ prefer_stoc_cipher { des | 3des | aes128 } ] | [ prefer_ctos_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 |
md5 | md5_96 } ] | [ prefer_stoc_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ] ] * [ -ki
aliveinterval [ -kc alivecountmax ] ] command. You can log in to the SSH server through
STelnet.
l For IPv6 addresses,
Run the stelnet ipv6 host-ipv6 [ -i interface-type interface-number ] [ port ] [ [ prefer_kex
{ dh_group1 | dh_exchange_group } ] | [ prefer_ctos_cipher { des | 3des | aes128 } ] |
[ prefer_stoc_cipher { des | 3des | aes128 } ] | [ prefer_ctos_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 |
md5 | md5_96 } ] | [ prefer_stoc_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ] ] * [ -ki
aliveinterval [ -kc alivecountmax ] ]command. You can log in to the SSH server through
STelnet.
----End
9.5.5 Checking the Configuration
After configuring the STelnet client, you can view the global configuration of the SSH server.
Prerequisite
The configuration of the STelnet Client Function are complete.
Procedure
l
Run the display ssh server-info command to check the mapping between the RSA public
key and the SSH client on the SSH client.
l
Run the display ssh server session command to check the session of the SSH client on the
SSH server.
----End
Example
When running the display ssh server session command, you can view that the client logs in
from VTY3, with Stelent service by password authentication.
<Quidway> display ssh server session
Session 1:
Conn
: VTY 3
Version
: 2.0
State
: started
Username
: client001
Retry
: 1
CTOS Cipher
: aes128-cbc
STOC Cipher
: aes128-cbc
CTOS Hmac
: hmac-sha1-96
STOC Hmac
: hmac-sha1-96
Kex
: diffie-hellman-group1-sha1
Service Type
: stelnet
Authentication Type : password
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
9.6 Configuring the SFTP Client Function
This section explains how to configure the SFTP client. The authentication and bidirectional
data encryption of the SFTP client can be manually configured, which will ensure secure file
transmission on the network.
9.6.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring the SFTP client, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete
the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
SFTP enables users to log in to the device from a secure remote end to manage files. This
improves the security of data transmission for the remote end to update its system. The SFTP
client function also enables you to log in to the remote device through SFTP for the secure file
transmission.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before connecting the SFTP client to the SSH server, complete the following tasks:
l
Creating a local RSA key pair on an SSH server
l
Configuring an SFTP client on the SSH server
l
Enabling the SFTP service on the SSH server
Data Preparation
To connect an SFTP client to an SSH server, you need the following data.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
No.
Data
1
Name of the SSH server
2
Number of the port monitored by the SSH server
3
Preferred encrypted algorithm from the SFTP client to the SSH server
4
Preferred encrypted algorithm from the SFTP server to the SSH client
5
Preferred HMAC algorithm from the SFTP client to the SSH server
6
Preferred HMAC algorithm from the SFTP server to the SSH client
7
Preferred algorithm of key exchange
8
Name of the outgoing interface
9
Directory name
10
File name
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
9.6.2 Configuring the First-Time Authentication on the SSH Client
After the first-time authentication on the SSH client is enabled, the STelnet client does not check
the validity of the RSA public key when logging in to the SSH server for the first time.
Context
If the first-time authentication on the SSH client is enabled, the STelnet client does not check
the validity of the RSA public key when logging in to the SSH server for the first time. After
the login, the system automatically allocates the RSA public key and saves it for authentication
in next login.
To simplify user operations, you are recommended to enable the first-time authentication on the
SSH client.
Do as follows on the switch that serves as an SSH client:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ssh client first-time enable
Enable the SSH client with the first authentication.
By default, first-time authentication is disabled on SSH clients.
NOTE
l The purpose of enabling the first-time authentication on the SSH client is to skip checking the validity
of the RSA public key of the SSH server when the SFTP client logs in to the SSH server for the first
time. The check is skipped because the SFTP server has not saved the RSA public key of the SSH
server.
l If the first-time authentication is not enabled on the SSH client, when the SFTP client logs in to the
SSH server for the first time, the SFTP client fails to pass the check on the RSA public key validity
and cannot log in to the server.
TIP
Except for enabling the first-time authentication on the SSH client, the SFTP client can assign the RSA
public key in advance to the SSH server on the SSH client to log in to the server successfully for the first
time.
----End
9.6.3 (Optional) Assigning an RSA Public Key to the SSH Server
You can assign an RSA public key on the SSH client to the SSH server.
Context
If the first-time authentication on the SSH client is disabled, you need to assign an RSA public
key to the SSH server before the STelnet client logs in to the SSH server.
Do as follows on the switch that serves as an SSH client:
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
rsa peer-public-key key-name
The public key view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
public-key-code begin
The public key editing view is displayed.
Step 4 Run:
hex-data
The public key is edited.
The public key must be a string of hexadecimal alphanumeric characters. It is automatically
generated by an SSH client. You can run the display rsa local-key-pair public command to
view a generated public key.
Step 5 Run:
public-key-code end
Quit the public key editing view.
If the specified hex-data is invalid, the public key cannot be generated after the peer-publickey end command is run; If the specified key-name is deleted in other views, the system prompts
that the key does not exist after the peer-public-key end command is run and the system view
is displayed.
Step 6 Run:
peer-public-key end
Return to the system view from the public key view.
Step 7 Run:
ssh client servername assign rsa-key keyname
Assign a public key to the SSH server.
NOTE
l Before being assigned to the SSH server, the assigned peer RSA public key must be obtained from the
SSH server and must be configured on the SSH client. Then, the SFTP client can successfully undergo
the validity check on the RSA public key of the SSH server.
l If the RSA public key stored on the SSH client becomes invalid, run the undo ssh client servername
assign rsa-key command to cancel the association between the SSH client and the SSH server. Then,
run the ssh client servername assign rsa-key keyname command to allocate a new RSA public key to
the SSH server.
----End
9.6.4 Enabling the SFTP Client
You can log in to the SSH server from the SSH client through SFTP.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
Context
NOTE
The command of enabling the SFTP client is similar to that of the STelnet. When accessing the SSH server,
the SFTP can carry the source address and choose the key exchange algorithm, encrypted algorithm and
HMAC algorithm, and configure the keepalive function.
Do as follows on the switch that serves as an SSH client.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 According to the address type of the SSH server, select and perform one of the two configurations
below.
l For IPv4 addresses,
Run:
sftp [ -a source-address ] host-ipv4 [ port ] [ [ public-net | -vpn-instance vpninstance-name ] | [ prefer_kex { dh_group1 | dh_exchange_group } ] |
[ prefer_ctos_cipher { des | 3des | aes128 } ] | [ prefer_stoc_cipher { des |
3des | aes128 } ] | [ prefer_ctos_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ] |
[ prefer_stoc_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ] ] * [ -ki aliveinterval
[ -kc alivecountmax ] ]
You can log in to the SSH server through SFTP.
l For IPv6 addresses,
Run:
sftp ipv6 [ -a source-address ] host-ipv6 [ -i interface-type interfacenumber ] [ port ] [ [ prefer_kex { dh_group1 | dh_exchange_group } ] |
[ prefer_ctos_cipher { des | 3des | aes128 } ] | [ prefer_stoc_cipher { des |
3des | aes128 } ] | [ prefer_ctos_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ] |
[ prefer_stoc_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ] ] * [ -ki aliveinterval
[ -kc alivecountmax ] ]
----End
9.6.5 (Optional) Managing the Directory
On the SFTP client, you can log in to the SSH server to create or delete directories on the SSH
server.
Context
NOTE
After the SFTP client logs in to the SSH server, the SFTP client can create or delete the directory on the
SSH server, display the current operating directory and information about a specified directory and its files.
Do as follows on the switch that serves as an SSH client:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
141
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 According to the address type of the SSH server, select and perform one of the two configurations
below.
l For IPv4 addresses,
Run:
sftp [ -a source-address ] host-ipv4 [ port ] [ [ public-net | -vpn-instance vpninstance-name ] | [ prefer_kex { dh_group1 | dh_exchange_group } ] |
[ prefer_ctos_cipher { des | 3des | aes128 } ] | [ prefer_stoc_cipher { des |
3des | aes128 } ] | [ prefer_ctos_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ] |
[ prefer_stoc_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ] ] * [ -ki aliveinterval
[ -kc alivecountmax ] ]
You can log in to the SSH server through SFTP.
l For IPv6 addresses,
Run:
sftp ipv6 [ -a source-address ] host-ipv6 [ -i interface-type interfacenumber ] [ port ] [ [ prefer_kex { dh_group1 | dh_exchange_group } ] |
[ prefer_ctos_cipher { des | 3des | aes128 } ] | [ prefer_stoc_cipher { des |
3des | aes128 } ] | [ prefer_ctos_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ] |
[ prefer_stoc_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ] ] * [ -ki aliveinterval
[ -kc alivecountmax ] ]
Step 3 Perform the following as required:
l Run:
cd [ remote-directory ]
The current operating directory of users is changed.
l Run:
cdup
The operating directory of users is switched to the upper-level directory.
l Run:
pwd
The current operating directory of users is displayed.
l Run:
dir / ls [ remote-directory ]
The file list in the specified directory is displayed.
l Run:
rmdir remote-directory & <1-10>
l The directory on the server is deleted.
l Run:
mkdir remote-directory
A directory is created on the server.
----End
9.6.6 (Optional) Managing the File
On the SFTP client, you can view specified remote directories or files on the SFTP server or
delete specified files on the SFTP server.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
Context
NOTE
After the SFTP client logs in to the SSH server, SFTP client can change file names, delete files, display
the file list, upload and download files on the SFTP server.
Do as follows on the login switch.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 According to the address type of the SSH server, select and perform one of the two configurations
below.
l For IPv4 addresses,
Run:
sftp [ -a source-address ] host-ipv4 [ port ] [ [ public-net | -vpn-instance vpninstance-name ] | [ prefer_kex { dh_group1 | dh_exchange_group } ] |
[ prefer_ctos_cipher { des | 3des | aes128 } ] | [ prefer_stoc_cipher { des |
3des | aes128 } ] | [ prefer_ctos_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ] |
[ prefer_stoc_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ] ] * [ -ki aliveinterval
[ -kc alivecountmax ] ]
You can log in to the SSH server through SFTP.
l For IPv6 addresses,
Run:
sftp ipv6 [ -a source-address ] host-ipv6 [ -i interface-type interfacenumber ] [ port ] [ [ prefer_kex { dh_group1 | dh_exchange_group } ] |
[ prefer_ctos_cipher { des | 3des | aes128 } ] | [ prefer_stoc_cipher { des |
3des | aes128 } ] | [ prefer_ctos_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ] |
[ prefer_stoc_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ] ] * [ -ki aliveinterval
[ -kc alivecountmax ] ]
Step 3 Run the command.
l Run:
rename old-name new-name
The name of the specified file on the server is changed.
l Run:
get remote-filename [local-filename]
The file on the remote server is downloaded.
l Run:
put local-filename [remote-filename]
The local file is uploaded to the remote server.
l Run:
remove remote-filename
The file on the server is removed.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
143
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
9.6.7 (Optional) Displaying the SFTP Client Command Help
You can view the SFTP client command help.
Context
Do as follows on the login switch:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 According to the address type of the SSH server, select and perform one of the two configurations
below.
l For IPv4 addresses,
Run:
sftp [ -a source-address ] host-ipv4 [ port ] [ [ public-net | -vpn-instance vpninstance-name ] | [ prefer_kex { dh_group1 | dh_exchange_group } ] |
[ prefer_ctos_cipher { des | 3des | aes128 } ] | [ prefer_stoc_cipher { des |
3des | aes128 } ] | [ prefer_ctos_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ] |
[ prefer_stoc_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ] ] * [ -ki aliveinterval
[ -kc alivecountmax ] ]
You can log in to the SSH server through SFTP.
l For IPv6 addresses,
Run:
sftp ipv6 [ -a source-address ] host-ipv6 [ -i interface-type interfacenumber ] [ port ] [ [ prefer_kex { dh_group1 | dh_exchange_group } ] |
[ prefer_ctos_cipher { des | 3des | aes128 } ] | [ prefer_stoc_cipher { des |
3des | aes128 } ] | [ prefer_ctos_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ] |
[ prefer_stoc_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ] ] * [ -ki aliveinterval
[ -kc alivecountmax ] ]
Step 3 Run:
help [all | command-name ]
The SFTP client command help is displayed.
----End
9.6.8 Checking the Configuration
After configuring the SFTP client, you can view the global configuration of the SSH server.
Prerequisite
The configuration of the SFTP Client Function are complete.
Procedure
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Run the display ssh server-info command to check the mapping between the SSH server
and the RSA public key on the SSH client.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
144
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
l
9 Telnet and SSH
Run the display ssh server session command to check the session of the SSH client on the
SSH server.
----End
Example
Run the display ssh server session command, and you can view that the client logs in from the
VTY4 through the sftp service in rsa authentication mode.
[Quidway] display ssh server session
Session 2:
Conn
: VTY 4
Version
: 2.0
State
: started
Username
: client002
Retry
: 1
CTOS Cipher
: aes128-cbc
STOC Cipher
: aes128-cbc
CTOS Hmac
: hmac-sha1-96
STOC Hmac
: hmac-sha1-96
Kex
: diffie-hellman-group1-sha1
Service Type
: sftp
Authentication Type : rsa
9.7 Configuring the SCP Client
This section describes how to configure the SCP client. The SCP client sets up a secure
connection with the SCP server so that the client can upload files to the server or download files
from the server.
9.7.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring the SCP client, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for the configuration. This
will help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
SCP is a secure file transfer method based on SSH2.0. Unlike SFTP, SCP allows file uploading
or downloading without user authentication and public key assignment, and also supports file
uploading or downloading in batches.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the SCP client, complete the following tasks:
l
Generating a local RSA key pair on the SCP server
l
Configuring SCP users on the SCP server
l
Enabling SCP services on the SCP server
Data Preparation
To configure the SCP client, you need the following data.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
No.
Data
1
(Optional) Source IPv4 or IPv6 address and source interface of the local switch
2
Port number of the remote SCP server, VPN instance name, encryption algorithm for
uploading or downloading files, source files to be uploaded or downloaded, and
destination files to be uploaded or downloaded
9.7.2 (Optional) Configuring a Source IP Address for the SCP Client
It is more secure to configure a source IP address for the SCP client, and use the specified source
IP address to set up an SCP connection between the client and server.
Context
Do as follows on the switch functioning as the SCP client:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
scp client-source { -a source-ip-address | -i interface-type interface-number }
A source IP address or a source interface is configured for the SCP client.
At present, the available source interface must be a loobpack interface. A loopback interface is
recommended to improve network security.
----End
9.7.3 Copying Files
You can use SCP to upload files from the client to the server or download files from the server
to the client.
Context
NOTE
When logging in to the SCP server, the SCP client can carry source IP address and VPN instance name,
and select an encryption algorithm.
Do as follows on the switch functioning as the SCP client:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
146
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
Step 2 Files are uploaded from the SCP client to the remote SCP server or downloaded from the remote
SCP server to the SCP client.
l Basing on IPv4 address
scp [ -port port-number | public-net | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name | -a sourceaddress
| -i interface-type interface-number | -r | -cipher { des | 3des | aes128 } | -c ]* sourcefile
destinationfile
l Basing on IPv6 address
scp ipv6 [ -port port-number | public-net | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name | -a
sourceipv6address | -r | -cipher { des | 3des | aes128 } | -c ]* sourcefile destinationfile [ -i
interface-type interface-number ]
----End
9.7.4 Checking the Configuration
After the SCP client is successfully configured, you can view configurations of the SCP
connection.
Prerequisite
The configurations of the SCP client are complete.
Context
l
Run the display scp-client command to view the source IP address or source interface of
the SCP client.
Example
Run the display scp-client command, and you can view the source IP address of the SCP client.
<Quidway> display scp-client
The source of SCP ipv4 client: 1.1.1.1
The source of SCP ipv6 client: --
9.8 Configuration Examples
This section provides configuration examples for Telnet and SSH along with a configuration
flowchart. The configuration examples explain networking requirements, configuration notes,
and configuration roadmap.
9.8.1 Example for Configuring the Telnet Terminal Service
In this example, the authentication mode and password are configured for users to log in to the
switch through Telnet.
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 9-3, after logging in to Switch A, the user logs in to Switch B through Telnet
by using the default interface 23.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
147
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
Figure 9-3 Networking diagram of the remote login of the Ethernet user
PC
SwitchA
10.10.10.8/24
SwitchB
10.10.10.9/24
Switch
Interface
VLANIF interface
IP address
SwitchA
GigabitEthernet0/0/1
VLANIF 2
10.10.10.8/24
SwitchB
GigabitEthernet0/0/1
VLANIF 2
10.10.10.9/24
Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1.
Assign IP addresses to Switch A and Switch B.
2.
Configure an authentication mode and password on Switch B.
3.
Log in to Switch B from Switch A.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l
ID of the VLAN
l
IP address and number of the interface on the Switch A that functions as the Telnet client
l
IP address and number of the interface on the Switch B that functions as the Telnet server
l
Authentication mode and the password for a user to log in to Switch B through Telnet
Procedure
Step 1 Assign IP addresses.
# Assign IP address to Switch A that functions as the Telnet client.
<SwitchA> system-view
[SwitchA] vlan 2
[SwitchA-vlan2] quit
[SwitchA] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[SwitchA-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port hybrid pvid vlan 2
[SwitchA-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port hybrid untagged vlan 2
[SwitchA-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] quit
[SwitchA] interface vlanif 2
[SwitchA-Vlanif2] ip address 10.10.10.8 255.255.255.0
[SwitchA-Vlanif2] quit
[SwitchA]
# Assign an IP address to Switch B that functions as the Telnet server.
<SwitchB> system-view
[SwitchB] vlan 2
[SwitchB-vlan2] quit
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
[SwitchB] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port hybrid pvid vlan 2
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port hybrid untagged vlan 2
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] quit
[SwitchB] interface vlanif 2
[SwitchB-Vlanif2] ip address 10.10.10.9 255.255.255.0
[SwitchB-Vlanif2] quit
[SwitchB]
Step 2 Configure the authentication mode and password for Switch B.
[SwitchB] user-interface vty 0 4
[SwitchB-ui-vty0-4] authentication-mode password
[SwitchB-ui-vty0-4] set authentication password simple 123456
[SwitchB-ui-vty0-4] quit
[SwitchB]
Step 3 Verify the configuration.
# Log in to Switch B on Switch A through Telnet.
<SwitchA> telnet 10.10.10.9
Trying 10.10.10.9 ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected to 10.10.10.9 ...
Login authentication
Password:
info: The max number of VTY users is 20, and the current number
of VTY users on line is 1.
<SwitchB>
----End
Configuration Files
l
Configuration file of Switch A
#
sysname SwitchA
#
vlan batch 2
#
interface Vlanif2
ip address 10.10.10.8 255.255.255.0
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port hybrid pvid vlan 2
port hybrid untagged vlan 2
#
return
l
Configuration file of Switch B
#
sysname SwitchB
#
vlan batch 2
#
interface Vlanif2
ip address 10.10.10.9 255.255.255.0
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port hybrid pvid vlan 2
port hybrid untagged vlan 2
#
user-interface vty 0 4
set authentication password simple 123456
#
return
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
149
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
9.8.2 Example for Configuring the PC as the STelnet Client to
Connect to the SSH Server
This part provides an example for configuring the PC as the STelnet client to connect to the SSH
server. In this example, after generating the local key pair on the SSH server, configuring the
name and password of the SSH user on the SSH server, and enabling the STelnet service on the
SSH server, you can connect the Stelnet client to the SSH server.
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 9-4, after the STelnet service is enabled on the SSH server, the STelnet
client can log in to the SSH server with the password, RSA, password-rsa, or all authentication
mode.
Configure Client001 with the password as huawei and adopt the password authentication.
The IP address of the SSH server is 192.168.1.1.
The user interface supports only SSH.
Figure 9-4 Networking diagram of configuring the PC as the STelnet client to connect to the
SSH server
IP Network
SSH Client
SSH Server
Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1.
Configure Client001 on the SSH server.
2.
Enable STelnet service on the SSH server.
3.
Configure password authentication as the default authentication mode on the SSH server.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l
Name and the authentication mode of the SSH user
l
Password of the SSH user
l
Name of the SSH server
Procedure
Step 1 Generate a local key pair on the server.
<Quidway> system-view
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
150
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
[Quidway] sysname SSH Server
[SSH Server] rsa local-key-pair create
The key name will be: Quidway_Host
The range of public key size is (512 ~ 2048).
NOTES: If the key modulus is greater than 512,
It will take a few minutes.
Input the bits in the modulus[default = 512]: 768
Generating keys...
.......++++++++++++
..........++++++++++++
...................................++++++++
......++++++++
Step 2 Configure the VTY user interface.
[SSH
[SSH
[SSH
[SSH
Server] user-interface vty 0 4
Server-ui-vty0-4] authentication-mode aaa
Server-ui-vty0-4] protocol inbound ssh
Server-ui-vty0-4] quit
NOTE
If SSH is configured as the login protocol, the S5700 automatically disables Telnet.
Step 3 Configure the password of the SSH user Client001 to huawei.
[SSH
[SSH
[SSH
[SSH
[SSH
Server] aaa
Server-aaa]
Server-aaa]
Server-aaa]
Server-aaa]
local-user client001 password cipher huawei
local-user client001 privilege level 3
local-user client001 service-type ssh
quit
Step 4 Enable the STelnet service on the SSH server.
[SSH Server] stelnet server enable
[SSH Server] ssh authentication-type default password
Step 5 Verify the configuration.
# Log in to the device through the software putty, and specify the IP address of the device being
192.168.1.1 and the login protocol being SSH.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
151
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
# Log in to the device through the software putty, and enter the user name client001 and the
password huawei.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
152
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
----End
Configuration Files
l
Configuration file of the SSH server
#
sysname SSH Server
#
aaa
local-user client001 password cipher N`C55QK<`=/Q=^Q`MAF4<1!!
local-user client001 privilege level 3
local-user client001 service-type ssh
#
stelnet server enable
ssh authentication-type default password
#
user-interface vty 0 4
authentication-mode aaa
protocol inbound ssh
#
return
9.8.3 Example for Configuring the Switch as the STelnet Client to
Connect to the SSH Server
In this example, the local key pairs are generated on the STelnet client and the SSH server; the
public RSA key is generated on the SSH server and then bound to the STelnet client. In this
manner, the STelnet client can connect to the SSH server.
Networking Requirements
When you need to log in from a switch to other switches to configure the switches, you can
configure the switch as an STelnet client.
As shown in Figure 9-5, after the STelnet service is enabled on the SSH server, the STelnet
client can log in to the SSH server in the authentication mode of password, RSA, password-rsa,
or all.
The following login users need to be configured.
l
Client001, with the password as huawei and the authentication mode as password
l
Client002, with the password as rsakey001 and the authentication mode as RSA
The user interface supports only the SSH protocol.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
153
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
Figure 9-5 Networking diagram of connecting the STelnet client and the SSH server
SSH Server
10.164.39.222/24
10.164.39.221/24
10.164.39.220/24
Client001 Client002
Switch
Interface
VLANIF interface IP address
SSH server
GigabitEthernet0/0/1
VLANIF 10
10.164.39.222/24
Client001
GigabitEthernet0/0/1
VLANIF 10
10.164.39.220/24
Client002
GigabitEthernet0/0/1
VLANIF 10
10.164.39.221/24
Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1.
Create a VLAN that each interface belongs to and assign an IP address to each VLANIF
interface.
2.
Configure Client001 and Client002 on the SSH server.
3.
Create a local key pair on the STelnet client and SSH server separately.
4.
Generate an RSA public key on the SSH server and bind the RSA public key of the SSH
client to Client002.
5.
Enable the STelnet service on the SSH server.
6.
Client001 and Client002 log in to the SSH server through STelnet.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l
IP addresses of the FTP server and client, as shown in Figure 9-5
l
SSH user name and authentication mode
l
Password or RSA public key
l
SSH server name
Procedure
Step 1 Create a VLAN that each interface belongs to and assign an IP address to each VLANIF interface.
Create VLAN 10 on the Switch that functions as the server and assign IP address
10.164.39.222/24 to interface VLANIF10.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] vlan 10
[Quidway-vlan10] quit
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
154
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
[Quidway] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port hybrid pvid vlan 10
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port hybrid untagged vlan 10
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] quit
[Quidway] interface vlanif 10
[Quidway-Vlanif10] ip address 10.164.39.222 24
Assigning an IP address to the Switch that functions as Client001 or Client002 is the same as
assigning an IP address to VLANIF 10, and is not mentioned here.
Step 2 Create a local key pair on the SSH server.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] rsa local-key-pair create
The key name will be: Quidway_Host
The range of public key size is (512 ~ 2048).
NOTES:If the key modulus is greater than 512,
It will take a few minutes.
Input the bits in the modulus[default = 512]:
Generating keys...
.......++++++++++++
..........++++++++++++
...................................++++++++
......++++++++
Step 3 Create an SSH user on the server.
NOTE
SSH users can be authenticated in four modes: password, RSA, password-rsa, and all.
l Before configuring the authentication mode of password or password-rsa, you must configure a local
user.
l Before configuring the authentication mode of RSA, password-rsa, or all, you must copy the RSA
public key of the SSH client to the server.
# Configure a VTY user interface.
[Quidway] user-interface vty 0 4
[Quidway-ui-vty0-4] authentication-mode aaa
[Quidway-ui-vty0-4] protocol inbound ssh
[Quidway-ui-vty0-4] quit
l Create an SSH user named Client001.
# Create an SSH user named Client001 and configure the authentication mode as
password for the user.
[Quidway] ssh user client001
[Quidway] ssh user client001 authentication-type password
# Set the password of Client001 to huawei.
[Quidway] aaa
[Quidway-aaa] local-user client001 password simple huawei
[Quidway-aaa] local-user client001 service-type ssh
l # Create an SSH user named Client002 and configure the authentication mode as RSA for
the user.
[Quidway] ssh user client002
[Quidway] ssh user client002 authentication-type rsa
Step 4 Configure the RSA public key on the server.
# Create a local key pair on the client.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname client002
[client002] rsa local-key-pair create
# Check the RSA public key generated on the client.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
155
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
[client002] display rsa local-key-pair public
=====================================================
Time of Key pair created: 16:38:51 2007/5/25
Key name: client002_Host
Key type: RSA encryption Key
=====================================================
Key code:
3047
0240
BFF35E4B C61BD786 F907B5DE 7D6770C3 E5FD17AB
203C8FCB BBC8FDF2 F7CB674E 519E8419 0F6B97A8
EA91FC4B B9E18836 5E74BFD5 4C687767 A89C6B43
1D7E3E1B
0203
010001
Host public key for PEM format code:
---- BEGIN SSH2 PUBLIC KEY ---AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAAAQQC/815LxhvXhvkHtd59Z3DD5f0XqyA8j8u7
yP3y98tnTlGehBkPa5eo6pH8S7nhiDZedL/VTGh3Z6ica0Mdfj4b
---- END SSH2 PUBLIC KEY ---Public key code for pasting into OpenSSH authorized_keys file :
ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAAAQQC/815LxhvXhvkHtd59Z3DD5f0XqyA8j8u7yP3y98tn
TlGehBkPa5eo6pH8S7nhiDZedL/VTGh3Z6ica0Mdfj4b rsa-key
=====================================================
Time of Key pair created: 16:38:51 2007/5/25
Key name: client002_Server
Key type: RSA encryption Key
=====================================================
Key code:
3067
0260
BCFAC085 49A2E70E 1284F901 937D7B63 D7A077AB
D2797280 4BCA86C0 4CD18B70 5DFAC9D3 9A3F3E74
9B2AF4CB 69FA6483 E87DA590 7B47721A 16391E27
1C76ABAB 743C568B 1B35EC7A 8572A096 BCA9DF0E
BC89D3DB 5A83698C 9063DB39 A279DD89
0203
010001
[client002]
# Send the RSA public key generated on the client to the server.
[Quidway] rsa peer-public-key RsaKey001
Enter "RSA public key" view, return system view with "peer-public-key end".
[Quidway-rsa-public-key] public-key-code begin
Enter "RSA key code" view, return last view with "public-key-code end".
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] 3047
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] 0240
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] BFF35E4B C61BD786 F907B5DE 7D6770C3 E5FD17AB
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] 203C8FCB BBC8FDF2 F7CB674E 519E8419 0F6B97A8
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] EA91FC4B B9E18836 5E74BFD5 4C687767 A89C6B43
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] 1D7E3E1B
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] 0203
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] 010001
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] public-key-code end
[Quidway-rsa-public-key] peer-public-key end
Step 5 Bind the RSA public key of the SSH client to Client002.
[Quidway] ssh user client002 assign rsa-key RsaKey001
Step 6 Enable the STelnet service on the SSH server.
# Enable the STelnet service.
[Quidway] stelnet server enable
Step 7 Set the service type of Client001 and Client002 to STelnet.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
156
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
[Quidway] ssh user client001 service-type stelnet
[Quidway] ssh user client002 service-type stelnet
Step 8 Connect the STelnet and the SSH server.
# You must enable the initial authentication on the SSH client for the first login.
[client001] ssh client first-time enable
[client002] ssh client first-time enable
# Client001 logs in to the SSH server in password authentication mode by entering the user
name and password.
<client001> system-view
[client001] stelnet 10.164.39.222
Please input the username:client001
Trying 10.164.39.222 ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected to 10.164.39.222 ...
The server is not authenticated. Continue to access it?(Y/N):y
Save the server's public key?(Y/N):y
The server's public key will be saved with the name: 10.164.39.222. Please wait...
Enter password:
Enter the password huawei, and information indicating that the login succeeds is displayed as
follows:
info: The max number of VTY users is 20, and the current number
of VTY users on line is 1.
<Quidway>
# Client002 logs in to the SSH server in RSA authentication mode.
<client002> system-view
[client002] stelnet 10.164.39.222
Please input the username: client002
Trying 10.164.39.222 ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected to 10.164.39.222 ...
***********************************************************
info: The max number of VTY users is 20, and the current number
of VTY users on line is 1.
<Quidway>
Step 9 Verify the configuration.
After the configuration, run the commands of display ssh server status and display ssh server
session on the SSH server. You can view that the STelnet service is enabled, and that the STelnet
client logs in to the server successfully.
# Check the status of the SSH server.
[Quidway] display ssh server status
SSH version
SSH connection timeout
SSH server key generating interval
SSH Authentication retries
SFTP server
Stelnet server
Scp server
:1.99
:60 seconds
:0 hours
:3 times
:Disable
:Enable
:Disable
# Check the connection of the SSH server.
[Quidway] display ssh server session
Session 1:
Conn: VTY 3
Version: 2.0
State: started
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
157
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
Username: client001
Retry: 1
CTOS Cipher: aes128-cbc
STOC Cipher: aes128-cbc
CTOS Hmac: hmac-sha1-96
STOC Hmac: hmac-sha1-96
Kex: diffie-hellman-group1-sha1
Service Type: stelnet
Authentication Type: password
Session 1:
Conn: VTY 4
Version: 2.0
State: started
Username: client002
Retry: 1
CTOS Cipher: aes128-cbc
STOC Cipher: aes128-cbc
CTOS Hmac: hmac-sha1-96
STOC Hmac: hmac-sha1-96
Kex: diffie-hellman-group1-sha1
Service Type: stelnet
Authentication Type: rsa
# Check information about the SSH user.
[Quidway] display ssh user-information
User 1:
User Name: client001
Authentication-type: password
User-public-key-name: Sftp-directory: Service-type: stelnet
Authorization-cmd: No
User 2:
User Name: client002
Authentication-type: rsa
User-public-key-name: RsaKey001
Sftp-directory: Service-type: stelnet
Authorization-cmd: No
----End
Configuration Files
l
Configuration file of the Quidway, the SSH server
#
sysname Quidway
#
vlan batch 10
#
interface Vlanif10
ip address 10.164.39.222 255.255.255.0
#
rsa peer-public-key rsakey001
public-key-code begin
3047
0240
BFF35E4B C61BD786 F907B5DE 7D6770C3 E5FD17AB 203C8FCB BBC8FDF2 F7CB674E
519E8419 0F6B97A8 EA91FC4B B9E18836 5E74BFD5 4C687767 A89C6B43
1D7E3E1B
0203
010001
public-key-code end
peer-public-key end
#
aaa
local-user client001 password simple huawei
local-user client001 service-type ssh
#
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
158
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
stelnet server enable
ssh user client001
ssh user client002
ssh user client001 authentication-type password
ssh user client002 authentication-type rsa
ssh user client002 assign rsa-key RsaKey001
ssh user client001 service-type stelnet
ssh user client002 service-type stelnet
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port hybrid pvid vlan 10
port hybrid untagged vlan 10
#
user-interface vty 0 4
authentication-mode aaa
protocol inbound ssh
#
return
l
Configuration file of Client001, the SSH client
#
sysname client001
#
vlan batch 10
#
interface Vlanif10
ip address 10.164.39.220 255.255.255.0
#
ssh client first-time enable
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port hybrid pvid vlan 10
port hybrid untagged vlan 10
#
return
l
Configuration file of Client002, the SSH client
#
sysname client002
#
vlan batch 10
#
interface Vlanif10
ip address 10.164.39.221 255.255.255.0
#
ssh client first-time enable
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port hybrid pvid vlan 10
port hybrid untagged vlan 10
#
return
9.8.4 Example for Connecting the SFTP Clinet and the SSH Server
In this example, the local key pairs are generated on the SFTP client and the SSH server
respectively; the public RSA key is generated on the SSH server and bind the RSA public key
to the SFTP client. In this manner, the SFTP client can connect to the SSH server.
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 9-6, after the SFTP service is enabled on the SSH server, the SFTP client
can log in to the SSH server in the authentication mode of password, RSA, password-rsa, or all.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
159
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
Figure 9-6 Networking diagram for connecting the SFTP client and the SSH server
SSH Server
10.164.39.222/24
10.164.39.220/24
10.164.39.221/24
Client001 Client002
Switch
Interface
VLANIF interface
IP address
SSH server
GigabitEthernet0/0/1
VLANIF 10
10.164.39.222/24
Client001
GigabitEthernet0/0/1
VLANIF 10
10.164.39.220/24
Client002
GigabitEthernet0/0/1
VLANIF 10
10.164.39.221/24
Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1.
Create a VLAN that each interface belongs to and assign an IP address to each VLANIF
interface.
2.
Configure Client001 and Client002 on the SSH server.
3.
Create a local key pair on the SFTP client and SSH server separately.
4.
Create an RSA public key on the SSH server and bind the RSA public key of the SSH client
to Client002.
5.
Enable the SFTP service on the SSH server.
6.
Configure the type of service and authenticated directory for the SSH user.
7.
Client001 and Client002 log in to the SSH server through SFTP.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l
IP addresses of the FTP server and client, as shown in Figure 9-6
l
SSH user name and authentication mode
l
Password or RSA public key of the SSH user
l
SSH server name
Procedure
Step 1 Create a VLAN that each interface belongs to and assign an IP address to each VLANIF interface.
Create VLAN 10 on the S5700 that functions as the server and assign IP address
10.164.39.222/24 to VLANIF 10.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] vlan 10
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
160
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
[Quidway] quit
[Quidway] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port hybrid pvid vlan 10
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port hybrid untagged vlan 10
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] quit
[Quidway] interface vlanif 10
[Quidway-Vlanif10] ip address 10.164.39.222 24
Assigning an IP address to the S5700 that functions as Client001 or Client002 is the same as
assigning an IP address to VLANIF 10, and is not mentioned here.
Step 2 Create a local key pair on the SSH server.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] rsa local-key-pair create
The key name will be: Quidway_Host
The range of public key size is (512 ~ 2048).
NOTES: If the key modulus is greater than 512,
It will take a few minutes.
Input the bits in the modulus[default = 512]:
Generating keys...
...........++++++++++++
..................++++++++++++
...++++++++
...........++++++++
Step 3 Create an SSH user on the server.
NOTE
SSH users can be authenticated in four modes: password, RSA, password-rsa, and all.
l In password or password-rsa authentication mode, you must configure a local user.
l In RSA or all authentication mode, you must copy the RSA public key of the SSH client to the server.
# Configure a VTY user interface.
[Quidway] user-interface vty 0 4
[Quidway-ui-vty0-4] authentication-mode aaa
[Quidway-ui-vty0-4] protocol inbound ssh
[Quidway-ui-vty0-4] quit
l Create an SSH user named Client001.
# Create an SSH user named Client001 and configure the authentication mode as
password for the user.
[Quidway] ssh user client001
[Quidway] ssh user client001 authentication-type password
# Set the password of Client001 to huawei.
[Quidway] aaa
[Quidway-aaa] local-user client001 password simple huawei
[Quidway-aaa] local-user client001 service-type ssh
l # Create an SSH user named Client002 and configure the authentication mode as RSA for
the user.
[Quidway] ssh user client002
[Quidway] ssh user client002 authentication-type rsa
Step 4 Configure the RSA public key on the server.
# Create a local key pair on the client.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname client002
[client002] rsa local-key-pair create
# Check the RSA public key created on the client.
[client002] display rsa local-key-pair public
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
161
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
=====================================================
Time of Key pair created: 16:38:51 2007/5/25
Key name: client002_Host
Key type: RSA encryption Key
=====================================================
Key code:
3047
0240
BFF35E4B C61BD786 F907B5DE 7D6770C3 E5FD17AB
203C8FCB BBC8FDF2 F7CB674E 519E8419 0F6B97A8
EA91FC4B B9E18836 5E74BFD5 4C687767 A89C6B43
1D7E3E1B
0203
010001
Host public key for PEM format code:
---- BEGIN SSH2 PUBLIC KEY ---AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAAAQQC/815LxhvXhvkHtd59Z3DD5f0XqyA8j8u7
yP3y98tnTlGehBkPa5eo6pH8S7nhiDZedL/VTGh3Z6ica0Mdfj4b
---- END SSH2 PUBLIC KEY ---Public key code for pasting into OpenSSH authorized_keys file :
ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAAAQQC/815LxhvXhvkHtd59Z3DD5f0XqyA8j8u7yP3y98tn
TlGehBkPa5eo6pH8S7nhiDZedL/VTGh3Z6ica0Mdfj4b rsa-key
=====================================================
Time of Key pair created: 16:38:51 2007/5/25
Key name: client002_Server
Key type: RSA encryption Key
=====================================================
Key code:
3067
0260
BCFAC085 49A2E70E 1284F901 937D7B63 D7A077AB
D2797280 4BCA86C0 4CD18B70 5DFAC9D3 9A3F3E74
9B2AF4CB 69FA6483 E87DA590 7B47721A 16391E27
1C76ABAB 743C568B 1B35EC7A 8572A096 BCA9DF0E
BC89D3DB 5A83698C 9063DB39 A279DD89
0203
010001
[client]
# Send the RSA public key created on the client to the server.
[Quidway] rsa peer-public-key RsaKey001
Enter "RSA public key" view, return system view with "peer-public-key end".
[Quidway-rsa-public-key] public-key-code begin
Enter "RSA key code" view, return last view with "public-key-code end".
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] 3047
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] 0240
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] BFF35E4B C61BD786 F907B5DE 7D6770C3 E5FD17AB
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] 203C8FCB BBC8FDF2 F7CB674E 519E8419 0F6B97A8
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] EA91FC4B B9E18836 5E74BFD5 4C687767 A89C6B43
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] 1D7E3E1B
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] 0203
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] 010001
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] public-key-code end
[Quidway-rsa-public-key] peer-public-key end
Step 5 Bind the RSA public key of the SSH client to Client002.
[Quidway] ssh user client002 assign rsa-key RsaKey001
Step 6 Enable the SFTP service on the SSH server.
# Enable the SFTP service.
[Quidway] sftp server enable
Step 7 On the SSH server, set the type of service for the SSH user and the authorized directory.
Two SSH users are configured on the SSH server: Client001 in the password authentication
mode and Client002 in the RSA authentication mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
162
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
[Quidway]
[Quidway]
[Quidway]
[Quidway]
ssh
ssh
ssh
ssh
user
user
user
user
9 Telnet and SSH
client001
client001
client002
client002
service-type sftp
sftp-directory flash:/
service-type sftp
sftp-directory flash:/
Step 8 Connect the SFTP client and the SSH server.
# You must enable the initial authentication on the SSH client for the first login.
[client001] ssh client first-time enable
[client002] ssh client first-time enable
# Client001 logs in to the SSH server in password authentication mode.
<client001> system-view
[client001] sftp 10.164.39.222
Input Username:client001
Trying 10.164.39.222 ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Enter password:
sftp-client>
# Client002 logs in to the SSH server in RSA authentication mode.
<client002> system-view
[client002] sftp 10.164.39.222
Input Username: client002
Trying 10.164.39.222 ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
sftp-client>
Step 9 Verify the configuration.
After the configuration, run the display ssh server status and display ssh server session
commands on the SSH server. You can view that the SFTP service is enabled, and that the SFTP
client logs in to the server successfully.
# Check the status of the SSH server.
[Quidway] display ssh server status
SSH version
SSH connection timeout
SSH server key generating interval
SSH Authentication retries
SFTP server
Stelnet server
Scp server
:1.99
:60 seconds
:0 hours
:3 times
:Enable
:Disable
:Disable
# Check the connection of the SSH server.
[Quidway] display ssh server session
Session 1:
Conn: VTY 3
Version: 2.0
State: started
Username: client001
Retry: 1
CTOS Cipher: aes128-cbc
STOC Cipher: aes128-cbc
CTOS Hmac: hmac-sha1-96
STOC Hmac: hmac-sha1-96
Kex: diffie-hellman-group1-sha1
Service Type: sftp
Authentication Type: password
Session 2:
Conn: VTY 4
Version: 2.0
State: started
Username: client002
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
163
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
Retry: 1
CTOS Cipher: aes128-cbc
STOC Cipher: aes128-cbc
CTOS Hmac: hmac-sha1-96
STOC Hmac: hmac-sha1-96
Kex: diffie-hellman-group1-sha1
Service Type: sftp
Authentication Type: rsa
# Check information about the SSH user.
[Quidway] display ssh user-information
User 1:
User Name: client001
Authentication-type: password
User-public-key-name: Sftp-directory: flash:
Service-type: sftp
Authorization-cmd: No
User 2:
User Name: client002
Authentication-type: rsa
User-public-key-name: RsaKey001
Sftp-directory: flash:
Service-type: sftp
Authorization-cmd: No
----End
Configuration Files
l
Configuration file of the Quidway, the SSH server
#
sysname Quidway
#
vlan batch 10
#
interface Vlanif10
ip address 10.164.39.222 255.255.255.0
#
rsa peer-public-key rsakey001
public-key-code begin
3047
0240
C4989BF0 416DA8F2 2675910D 7F2997E8 5573A35D 0163FD4A FAC39A6E 0F45F325
A4E3AA1D 54692B04 C6A28D3D C58DE2E8 E0D58D65 7A25CF92 A74D21F9 E917182B
0203
010001
public-key-code end
peer-public-key end
#
aaa
local-user client001 password simple huawei
local-user client001 service-type ssh
#
sftp server enable
ssh user client001
ssh user client002
ssh user client001 authentication-type password
ssh user client002 authentication-type rsa
ssh user client002 assign rsa-key RsaKey001
ssh user client001 service-type sftp
ssh user client002 service-type sftp
ssh user client001 sftp-directory flash:/
ssh user client002 sftp-directory flash:/
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port hybrid pvid vlan 10
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
164
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
port hybrid untagged vlan 10
#
user-interface vty 0 4
authentication-mode aaa
protocol inbound ssh
#
return
l
Configuration file of Client001, the SSH client
#
sysname client001
#
vlan batch 10
#
interface Vlanif10
ip address 10.164.39.220 255.255.255.0
#
ssh client first-time enable
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port hybrid pvid vlan 10
port hybrid untagged vlan 10
#
return
l
Configuration file of Client002, the SSH client
#
sysname client002
#
vlan batch 10
#
interface Vlanif10
ip address 10.164.39.221 255.255.255.0
#
ssh client first-time enable
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port hybrid pvid vlan 10
port hybrid untagged vlan 10
#
return
9.8.5 Example for Configuring the SSH Server to Support the Access
from Another Port
In this example, the monitoring port number of the SSH server is set to a port number other than
the standard monitoring port number so that only valid users can set up connections with the
SSH server.
Networking Requirements
The standard listening port is numbered 22, as defined in the SSH protocol. If attackers access
the standard port continuously, the bandwidth is consumed and the performance of the server is
degraded. As a result, other valid users cannot access the port.
If the listening port on the SSH server is changed to a non-default one, attackers will not aware
of this change and continue to send a request for the socket connection to port 22. In this case,
the SSH server detects that it is not the listening port, and then denies the the request for
establishing the socket connection.
Therefore, only valid users can use the specified listening port to set up a socket connection
through the following procedures:
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
165
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
l
Negotiating the version of the SSH protocol
l
Negotiating the algorithm
l
Generating the session key
l
Authenticating
l
Sending a request for a session
l
Performing the interactive session
Figure 9-7 Networking diagram for configuring the SSH server to support the access from
another port
SSH Server
10.164.39.222/24
10.164.39.220/24
10.164.39.221/24
Client001 Client002
Switch
Interface
VLANIF interface
IP address
SSH server
GigabitEthernet0/0/1
VLANIF 10
10.164.39.222/24
Client001
GigabitEthernet0/0/1
VLANIF 10
10.164.39.220/24
Client002
GigabitEthernet0/0/1
VLANIF 10
10.164.39.221/24
Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1.
Create a VLAN that each interface belongs to and assign an IP address to each VLANIF
interface.
2.
Configure Client001 and Client002 on the SSH server.
3.
Create a local key pair on the SFTP client and SSH server separately.
4.
Generate an RSA public key on the SSH server and bind the RSA public key of the SSH
client to Client002.
5.
Enable the STelnet and SFTP services on the SSH server.
6.
Configure the type of the service and authenticated directory for the SSH user.
7.
Set the listening port number on the SSH server.
8.
Client001 and Client002 log in to the SSH server through STelnet and SFTP separately.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
IP addresses of the FTP server and client, as shown in Figure 9-7
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
166
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
l
SSH user name and authentication mode
l
Password or RSA public key of the SSH user
l
Server name
l
Listening port number on the SSH server
9 Telnet and SSH
Procedure
Step 1 Create a VLAN that each interface belongs to and assign an IP address to each VLANIF interface.
Create VLAN 10 on the Switch that functions as the server and assign IP address
10.164.39.222/24 to VLANIF 10.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] vlan 10
[Quidway-vlan10] quit
[Quidway] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port hybrid pvid vlan 10
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port hybrid untagged vlan 10
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] quit
[Quidway] interface vlanif 10
[Quidway-Vlanif10] ip address 10.164.39.222 24
Assigning an IP address to theSwitch that functions as Client001 or Client002 is the same as
assigning an IP address to VLANIF 10, and is not mentioned here.
Step 2 A local key pair generated on the SSH server
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] rsa local-key-pair create
The key name will be: Quidway_Host
The range of public key size is (512 ~ 2048).
NOTES: If the key modulus is greater than 512,
It will take a few minutes.
Input the bits in the modulus[default = 512]:
Generating keys...
...........++++++++++++
..................++++++++++++
...++++++++
...........++++++++
Step 3 Configure the RSA public key on the server.
# Create a local key pair on the client.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname client002
[client002] rsa local-key-pair create
# Check the RSA public key generated on the client.
[client002] display rsa local-key-pair public
=====================================================
Time of Key pair created: 16:38:51 2007/5/25
Key name: client002_Host
Key type: RSA encryption Key
=====================================================
Key code:
3047
0240
BFF35E4B C61BD786 F907B5DE 7D6770C3 E5FD17AB
203C8FCB BBC8FDF2 F7CB674E 519E8419 0F6B97A8
EA91FC4B B9E18836 5E74BFD5 4C687767 A89C6B43
1D7E3E1B
0203
010001
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
167
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
Host public key for PEM format code:
---- BEGIN SSH2 PUBLIC KEY ---AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAAAQQC/815LxhvXhvkHtd59Z3DD5f0XqyA8j8u7
yP3y98tnTlGehBkPa5eo6pH8S7nhiDZedL/VTGh3Z6ica0Mdfj4b
---- END SSH2 PUBLIC KEY ---Public key code for pasting into OpenSSH authorized_keys file :
ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAAAQQC/815LxhvXhvkHtd59Z3DD5f0XqyA8j8u7yP3y98tn
TlGehBkPa5eo6pH8S7nhiDZedL/VTGh3Z6ica0Mdfj4b rsa-key
=====================================================
Time of Key pair created: 16:38:51 2007/5/25
Key name: client002_Server
Key type: RSA encryption Key
=====================================================
Key code:
3067
0260
BCFAC085 49A2E70E 1284F901 937D7B63 D7A077AB
D2797280 4BCA86C0 4CD18B70 5DFAC9D3 9A3F3E74
9B2AF4CB 69FA6483 E87DA590 7B47721A 16391E27
1C76ABAB 743C568B 1B35EC7A 8572A096 BCA9DF0E
BC89D3DB 5A83698C 9063DB39 A279DD89
0203
010001
[client002]
# Send the RSA public key generated on the client to the server.
[Quidway] rsa peer-public-key RsaKey001
Enter "RSA public key" view, return system view with "peer-public-key end".
[Quidway-rsa-public-key] public-key-code begin
Enter "RSA key code" view, return last view with "public-key-code end".
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] 3047
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] 0240
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] BFF35E4B C61BD786 F907B5DE 7D6770C3 E5FD17AB
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] 203C8FCB BBC8FDF2 F7CB674E 519E8419 0F6B97A8
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] EA91FC4B B9E18836 5E74BFD5 4C687767 A89C6B43
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] 1D7E3E1B
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] 0203
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] 010001
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] public-key-code end
[Quidway-rsa-public-key] peer-public-key end
Step 4 Create an SSH user on the server.
NOTE
SSH users can be authenticated in four modes: password, RSA, password-rsa, and all.
l Before configuring the authentication mode of password or password-rsa, you must configure a local
user.
l Before configuring the authentication mode of RSA, password-rsa, or all, you must copy the RSA
public key of the SSH client to the server.
# Configure a VTY user interface.
[Quidway] user-interface vty 0 4
[Quidway-ui-vty0-4] authentication-mode aaa
[Quidway-ui-vty0-4] protocol inbound ssh
[Quidway-ui-vty0-4] quit
# Create an SSH user named Client001, and configure the authentication mode as password
for the user.
[Quidway] ssh user client001
[Quidway] ssh user client001 authentication-type password
# Set the password of Client001 to huawei.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
168
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
[Quidway] aaa
[Quidway-aaa] local-user client001 password simple huawei
[Quidway-aaa] local-user client001 service-type ssh
[Quidway-aaa] quit
# Set the type of service of Client001 to STelnet.
[Quidway] ssh user client001 service-type stelnet
# Create an SSH user named Client002, and configure the authentication mode as RSA for the
user. Bind the RSA public key of the SSH client to Client002.
[Quidway] ssh user client002
[Quidway] ssh user client002 authentication-type rsa
[Quidway] ssh user client002 assign rsa-key RsaKey001
# Set the type of service of Client002 to SFTP and the authorized directory as flash:/.
[Quidway] ssh user client002 service-type sftp
[Quidway] ssh user client002 sftp-directory flash:/
Step 5 Enable the STelnet and SFTP services on the SSH server.
[Quidway] stelnet server enable
[Quidway] sftp server enable
Step 6 Configure the new listening port number on the SSH server.
[Quidway] ssh server port 1025
Step 7 Connect the SSH client and the SSH server.
# You must enable the initial authentication on the SSH client for the first login.
[client001] ssh client first-time enable
[client002] ssh client first-time enable
# The STelnet client logs in to the SSH server by using the new listening port.
[client001] stelnet 10.164.39.222 1025
Please input the username:client001
Trying 10.164.39.222 ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected to 10.164.39.222 ...
The server is not authenticated. Do you continue to access it?(Y/N):y
Do you want to save the server's public key?(Y/N):y
The server's public key will be saved with the name: 10.164.39.222. Please wait...
Enter password:
Enter the password huawei, and information indicating that the login succeeds is displayed as
follows:
info: The max number of VTY users is 20, and the current number
of VTY users on line is 1.
<Quidway>
# The SFTP client logs in to the SSH server by using the new listening port.
[client002]sftp 10.164.39.222 1025
Please input the username:client002
Trying 10.164.39.222 ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
The server's public key does not match the one we cached.
The server is not authenticated. Do you continue to access it?(Y/N):y
Do you want to update the server's public key we cached?(Y/N):y
sftp-client>
Step 8 Verify the configuration.
Attackers fail to log in to the SSH server by using port 22.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
169
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
[client002] sftp 10.164.39.222
Please input the username:client002
Trying 10.164.39.222 ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Can't establish tcp connection to server
After the configuration, run the commands of display ssh server status and display ssh server
session on the SSH server. You can check the current listening port number on the SSH server,
and that the STelnet or SFTP client logs in to the server successfully.
# Check the status of the SSH server.
[Quidway] display ssh server status
SSH version
SSH connection timeout
SSH server key generating interval
SSH Authentication retries
SFTP server
Stelnet server
Scp server
SSH server port
:1.99
:60 seconds
:0 hours
:3 times
:Enable
:Enable
:Disable
:1025
# Check the connection of the SSH server.
[Quidway] display ssh server session
Session 1:
Conn: VTY 3
Version: 2.0
State: started
Username: client001
Retry: 1
CTOS Cipher: aes128-cbc
STOC Cipher: aes128-cbc
CTOS Hmac: hmac-sha1-96
STOC Hmac: hmac-sha1-96
Kex: diffie-hellman-group1-sha1
Service Type: stelnet
Authentication Type: password
Session 2:
Conn: VTY 4
Version: 2.0
State: started
Username: client002
Retry: 1
CTOS Cipher: aes128-cbc
STOC Cipher: aes128-cbc
CTOS Hmac: hmac-sha1-96
STOC Hmac: hmac-sha1-96
Kex: diffie-hellman-group1-sha1
Service Type: sftp
Authentication Type: rsa
----End
Configuration Files
l
Configuration file of the Quidway, the SSH server
#
sysname Quidway
#
vlan batch 10
#
interface Vlanif10
ip address 10.164.39.222 255.255.255.0
#
rsa peer-public-key rsakey001
public-key-code begin
3047
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
170
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
0240
C4989BF0 416DA8F2 2675910D 7F2997E8 5573A35D 0163FD4A FAC39A6E 0F45F325
A4E3AA1D 54692B04 C6A28D3D C58DE2E8 E0D58D65 7A25CF92 A74D21F9 E917182B
0203
010001
public-key-code end
peer-public-key end
#
aaa
local-user client001 password simple huawei
local-user client001 service-type ssh
#
sftp server enable
stelnet server enable
ssh server port 1025
ssh user client001
ssh user client002
ssh user client001 authentication-type password
ssh user client002 authentication-type rsa
ssh user client002 assign rsa-key RsaKey001
ssh user client001 service-type stelnet
ssh user client002 service-type sftp
ssh user client002 sftp-directory flash:/
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port hybrid pvid vlan 10
port hybrid untagged vlan 10
#
user-interface vty 0 4
authentication-mode aaa
protocol inbound ssh
#
return
l
Configuration file of Client001, the SSH client
#
sysname client001
#
vlan batch 10
#
interface Vlanif10
ip address 10.164.39.220 255.255.255.0
#
ssh client first-time enable
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port hybrid pvid vlan 10
port hybrid untagged vlan 10
#
return
l
Configuration file of Client002, the SSH client
#
sysname client002
#
vlan batch 10
#
interface Vlanif10
ip address 10.164.39.221 255.255.255.0
#
ssh client first-time enable
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port hybrid pvid vlan 10
port hybrid untagged vlan 10
#
return
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
171
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
9.8.6 Example for Authenticating SSH Through RADIUS
In this example, a user that attempts to access the SSH server is authenticated by the RADIUS
server, and the SSH server determines whether to set up a connection with the user according
to the authentication result.
Networking Requirements
When an RADIUS user is connected to an SSH server, the SSH server sends the user name and
password of the SSH client to the RADIUS server (compatible with the TACACS server) for
authentication.
The RADIUS server authenticates the user and sends the result (passed or failed) back to the
SSH server. If the authentication is successful, the user level is sent along with the result. The
SSH server determines whether the SSH client is allowed to set up a connection according to
the authentication result.
Figure 9-8 shows the networking diagram.
Figure 9-8 Networking diagram of authenticating the SSH through RADIUS
10.164.39.221/24
SSH Client
10.164.39.222/24
SSH Server
10.164.6.49/24
Radius Server
Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1.
Configure the RADIUS template on the SSH server.
2.
Configure a domain on the SSH server.
3.
Create a user on the RADIUS server.
4.
Generate the local key pair on STelnet client and SSH server respectively. The SSH server
monitors the port number.
5.
Generate the local key pair on the client and SSH server .
6.
Generate the RSA public key on SSH server and bind the RSA public key of the SSH client
to [email protected].
7.
Enable the STelnet and SFTP services on the SSH server.
8.
Configure the service mode and authorization directory of the SSH user.
9.
Users [email protected] and [email protected] log in to the SSH server through STelnet and
SFTP respectively.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
172
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
l
Configure the password authentication for the two SSH users .
l
RADIUS authentication
l
Name of the RADIUS template
l
Name of the RADIUS domain
l
Name and password of the RADIUS user
9 Telnet and SSH
Procedure
Step 1 Generate a local key pair on the SSH server.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] rsa local-key-pair create
The key name will be: Quidway_Host
The range of public key size is (512 ~ 2048).
NOTES: If the key modulus is greater than 512,
It will take a few minutes.
Input the bits in the modulus[default = 512]: 768
Generating keys...
.......++++++++++++
..........++++++++++++
...................................++++++++
......++++++++
Step 2 Configure the RSA public key of the server.
# Generate a local key pair of client on the client.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname client
[client] rsa local-key-pair create
# View the RSA public key generated on the client.
[client] display rsa local-key-pair public
=====================================================
Time of Key pair created: 16:38:51 2007/5/25
Key name: Quidway_Host
Key type: RSA encryption Key
=====================================================
Key code:
3047
0240
BFF35E4B C61BD786 F907B5DE 7D6770C3 E5FD17AB
203C8FCB BBC8FDF2 F7CB674E 519E8419 0F6B97A8
EA91FC4B B9E18836 5E74BFD5 4C687767 A89C6B43
1D7E3E1B
0203
010001
Host public key for PEM format code:
---- BEGIN SSH2 PUBLIC KEY ---AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAAAQQC/815LxhvXhvkHtd59Z3DD5f0XqyA8j8u7
yP3y98tnTlGehBkPa5eo6pH8S7nhiDZedL/VTGh3Z6ica0Mdfj4b
---- END SSH2 PUBLIC KEY ---Public key code for pasting into OpenSSH authorized_keys file :
ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAAAQQC/815LxhvXhvkHtd59Z3DD5f0XqyA8j8u7yP3y98tn
TlGehBkPa5eo6pH8S7nhiDZedL/VTGh3Z6ica0Mdfj4b rsa-key
=====================================================
Time of Key pair created: 16:38:51 2007/5/25
Key name: Quidway_Server
Key type: RSA encryption Key
=====================================================
Key code:
3067
0260
BCFAC085 49A2E70E 1284F901 937D7B63 D7A077AB
D2797280 4BCA86C0 4CD18B70 5DFAC9D3 9A3F3E74
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
173
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
9B2AF4CB 69FA6483 E87DA590 7B47721A 16391E27
1C76ABAB 743C568B 1B35EC7A 8572A096 BCA9DF0E
BC89D3DB 5A83698C 9063DB39 A279DD89
0203
010001
[client]
# Send the RSA public key generated on the client to the server.
[Quidway] rsa peer-public-key RsaKey001
Enter "RSA public key" view, return system view with "peer-public-key end".
[Quidway-rsa-public-key] public-key-code begin
Enter "RSA key code" view, return last view with "public-key-code end".
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] 3047
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] 0240
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] BFF35E4B C61BD786 F907B5DE 7D6770C3 E5FD17AB
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] 203C8FCB BBC8FDF2 F7CB674E 519E8419 0F6B97A8
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] EA91FC4B B9E18836 5E74BFD5 4C687767 A89C6B43
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] 1D7E3E1B
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] 0203
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] 010001
[Quidway-rsa-key-code] public-key-code end
[Quidway-rsa-public-key] peer-public-key end
Step 3 Create the SSH user.
On the RADIUS server, add two users named [email protected] and [email protected] ; in addition,
designate the NAS address 10.164.39.222 and the key huawei. The NAS address refers to the
address of the SSH server that connects to the RADIUS server.
# Configure the VTY user interface on the SSH server.
[Quidway] user-interface vty 0 4
[Quidway-ui-vty0-4] authentication-mode aaa
[Quidway-ui-vty0-4] protocol inbound ssh
[Quidway-ui-vty0-4] quit
# Create SSH users [email protected] and [email protected] on the SSH server.
[Quidway]
[Quidway]
[Quidway]
[Quidway]
[Quidway]
[Quidway]
[Quidway]
ssh
ssh
ssh
ssh
ssh
ssh
ssh
user
user
user
user
user
user
user
[email protected]
[email protected] authentication-type password
[email protected] service-type stelnet
[email protected]
[email protected] authentication-type password
[email protected] service-type sftp
client001 sftp-directory flash:/
Step 4 Configure the RADIUS template.
# Configure the authentication scheme newscheme and authentication mode RADIUS.
[Quidway] aaa
[Quidway-aaa] authentication-scheme newscheme
[Quidway-aaa-authen-newscheme] authentication-mode radius
[Quidway-aaa-authen-newscheme] quit
# Configure the RADIUS template of SSH server as ssh.
[Quidway] radius-server template ssh
# Configure the IP address as 10.164.6.49 and port of the RADIUS authentication server as 1812.
[Quidway-radius-ssh] radius-server authentication 10.164.6.49 1812
# Configure the key of RADIUS server as huawei.
[Quidway-radius-ssh] radius-server shared-key huawei
[Quidway-radius-ssh] quit
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
174
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
Step 5 Configure RADIUS domain name.
# Configure the RADIUS domain of SSH server as ssh.com, applying authentication scheme
newscheme and RADIUS template ssh.
[Quidway] aaa
[Quidway-aaa] domain ssh.com
[Quidway-aaa-domain-ssh.com] authentication-scheme newscheme
[Quidway-aaa-domain-ssh.com] radius-server ssh
[Quidway-aaa-domain-ssh.com] quit
[Quidway-aaa] quit
Step 6 Connect the SSH client and the SSH server.
# Enable STelnet and SFTP services on the SSH server.
[Quidway] stelnet server enable
[Quidway] sftp server enable
# For the first login, you need to enable the first authentication on SSH client.
[client] ssh client first-time enable
[client] quit
# Connect the STelnet client to the SSH server in the RADIUS authentication.
<client> system-view
[client] stelnet 10.164.39.222
Please input the username: [email protected]
Trying 10.164.39.222 ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected to 10.164.39.222 ...
he server is not authenticated. Do you continue to access it?(Y/N):y
Do you want to save the server's public key?(Y/N):y
he server's public key will be saved with the name: 10.164.39.222. Please wait...
Enter password:
Enter the password Huawei and view as follows:
Info: The max number of VTY users is 10, and the current number
of VTY users on line is 2.
<Quidway>
# Connect the SFTP client to the SSH server in the RADIUS authentication.
<client> system-view
[client] sftp 10.164.39.222
Please input the username: [email protected]
Trying 10.164.39.222 ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected to 10.164.39.222 ...
Enter password:
sftp-client>
Step 7 Verify the configuration.
After the configuration, run the display radius-server configuration and display ssh server
session commands on the SSH server. You can view the configuration of the RADIUS server
on the SSH server. You can also view that the STelnet or SFTP client is connected to the SSH
server successfully with RADIUS authentication.
# Display the configuration of the RADIUS server.
[Quidway-aaa] display radius-server configuration
------------------------------------------------------------------Server-template-name
: ssh
Protocol-version
: standard
Traffic-unit
: B
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
175
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
Shared-secret-key
: huawei
Timeout-interval(in second)
: 5
Primary-authentication-server
: 10.164.6.49
:1812
LoopBack:NULL
Primary-accounting-server
: 0.0.0.0
:0
LoopBack:NULL
Secondary-authentication-server : 0.0.0.0
:0
LoopBack:NULL
Secondary-accounting-server
: 0.0.0.0
:0
LoopBack:NULL
Retransmission
: 3
Domain-included
: YES
Calling-station-id MAC-format
: xxxx-xxxx-xxxx
------------------------------------------------------------------Total of radius template :1
# Display the connection of the SSH server.
[Quidway] display ssh server session
Session 1:
Conn
: VTY 0
Version
: 2.0
State
: started
Username
: [email protected]
Retry
: 1
CTOS Cipher
: aes128-cbc
STOC Cipher
: aes128-cbc
CTOS Hmac
: hmac-sha1-96
STOC Hmac
: hmac-sha1-96
Kex
: diffie-hellman-group1-sha1
Service Type
: stelnet
Authentication Type : password
Session 2:
Conn
: VTY 1
Version
: 2.0
State
: started
Username
: [email protected]
Retry
: 1
CTOS Cipher
: aes128-cbc
STOC Cipher
: aes128-cbc
CTOS Hmac
: hmac-sha1-96
STOC Hmac
: hmac-sha1-96
Kex
: diffie-hellman-group1-sha1
Service Type
: sftp
Authentication Type : password
----End
Configuration Files
Configuration file of the SSH server
#
sysname Quidway
#
radius-server template ssh
radius-server authentication 10.164.6.49 1812
#
rsa peer-public-key rsakey001
public-key-code begin
3047
0240
C4989BF0 416DA8F2 2675910D 7F2997E8 5573A35D 0163FD4A FAC39A6E 0F45F325
A4E3AA1D 54692B04 C6A28D3D C58DE2E8 E0D58D65 7A25CF92 A74D21F9 E917182B
0203
010001
public-key-code end
peer-public-key end
#
aaa
authentication-scheme newscheme
authentication-mode radius
#
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
176
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
domain ssh.com
authentication-scheme newscheme
radius-server ssh
#
#
sftp server enable
stelnet server enable
ssh user [email protected]
ssh user [email protected]
ssh user [email protected] authentication-type password
ssh user [email protected] authentication-type password
ssh user [email protected] assign rsa-key RsaKey001
ssh user [email protected] service-type stelnet
ssh user [email protected] service-type sftp
ssh user client001 sftp-directory flash:/
#
user-interface vty 0 4
authentication-mode aaa
protocol inbound ssh
#
Return
9.8.7 Example for Configuring the SCP Client
This section provides an example for configuring the SCP client. In this example, the SCP client
accesses the SCP server to download files.
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 9-9, the switch functioning as the SCP client has a reachable route to the
SCP server, and can download files from the SCP server.
Figure 9-9 Networking diagram of the SCP client
SCP Server
172.16.104.110/24
1.1.1.1/32
SCP Client
Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1.
Create a local RSA key pair on the SSH server.
2.
Create an SSH user on the SSH server.
3.
Enable SCP services on the SSH server.
4.
Enable first-time authentication on the SSH client.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
177
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
5.
Configure an IP address of the source interface on the SCP client.
6.
Download files from the SSH server to the SCP client.
9 Telnet and SSH
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l
SSH user name, authentication mode, and authentication password
l
IP address of the source interface on the SCP client
l
The name and path of the destination files and the source files.
Procedure
Step 1 Create a local RSA key pair on the SSH server.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname SSH Server
[SSH Server] rsa local-key-pair create
The key name will be: SSH Server_Host
The range of public key size is (512 ~ 2048).
NOTES: If the key modulus is greater than 512,
It will take a few minutes.
Input the bits in the modulus[default = 512]: 512
Generating keys...
.....++++++++++++
....++++++++++++
......++++++++
................................++++++++
Step 2 Create an SSH user on the SCP server.
# Configure the VTY user interface.
[SSH
[SSH
[SSH
[SSH
Server] user-interface vty 0 4
Server-ui-vty0-4] authentication-mode aaa
Server-ui-vty0-4] protocol inbound ssh
Server-ui-vty0-4] quit
# Configure the password authentication for the SSH user Client001.
[SSH Server] ssh user client001
[SSH Server] ssh user client001 authentication-type password
# Configure the password of the SSH user Client001 to huawei.
[SSH
[SSH
[SSH
[SSH
Server] aaa
Server-aaa] local-user client001 password cipher huawei
Server-aaa] local-user client001 service-type ssh
Server-aaa] quit
# Configure the service type for the SSH users Client001 to all.
[SSH Server] ssh user client001 service-type all
Step 3 Enable SCP services on the SCP server.
[SSH Server] scp server enable
Step 4 Download files from the SCP server to the SCP client.
# For the first login, you need to enable the first authentication on SSH client.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname SCP Client
[SCP Client] ssh client first-time enable
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
178
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
9 Telnet and SSH
# Configure the IP address 1.1.1.1 of a loopback interface as the source IP address for the SCP
client.
[SCP Client] scp client-source -a 1.1.1.1
# Use 3des to encrypt the file license.txt, and then download the file to the local working
directory from the remote SCP server with the IP address of 172.16.104.110.
[SCP Client] scp -a 1.1.1.1 -cipher 3des [email protected]:license.txt
license.txt
Step 5 Verify the configuration.
Run the display scp-client command on the SCP client. The command output is as follows:
<Quidway> display scp-client
The source of SCP ipv4 client: 1.1.1.1
The IP address of the source interface on the SCP client is 1.1.1.1.
----End
Configuration Files
l
Configuration file of the SCP server
#
sysname SSH Server
#
aaa
local-user client001 password simple huawei
local-user client001 service-type ssh
#
scp server enable
ssh user client001
ssh user client001 authentication-type password
ssh user client001 service-type all
#
user-interface vty 0 4
authentication-mode aaa
protocol inbound ssh
#
return
l
Configuration file of the SCP client
#
sysname SCP Client
#
ssh client first-time enable
scp client-source 1.1.1.1
#
return
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
179
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
10
10 Web System Configuration
Web System Configuration
About This Chapter
Before configuring the S5700 in Web mode, you need to configure the S5700 as the Web server.
10.1 Overview of Web System
Through the Web system, users can manage and maintain the S5700 in the graphical user
interface (GUI).
10.2 Starting Web System
This topic describes how to load the Web system and create an account of the Web system.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
180
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
10 Web System Configuration
10.1 Overview of Web System
Through the Web system, users can manage and maintain the S5700 in the graphical user
interface (GUI).
To facilitates the use and maintenance of the S5700 , Huawei develops the Web system for
S5700.
The S5700 is installed with a built-in Web server. Thus, the terminal (such as a PC) connected
to the S5700 can access the S5700 through the Web browser.
Figure 10-1 shows the running environment of the Web system.
Figure 10-1 Running environment of the Web System
Switch
HTTP
Connection
PC
10.2 Starting Web System
This topic describes how to load the Web system and create an account of the Web system.
10.2.1 Logging In to the S5700 Through the Console Interface
Context
When setting up a local configuration environment through the console interface, you can
connect the PC and the S5700 through the Windows HyperTerminal.
Procedure
Step 1 Enable the HyperTerminal on the PC.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
181
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
10 Web System Configuration
Choose Start > All Programs > Accessories > Communications > HyperTerminal to start
the HyperTerminal.
Step 2 Set up a new connection.
As shown in Figure 10-2, enter the name of the new connection in the Name text box and choose
an icon. Click OK.
Figure 10-2 Setting up a new connection
Step 3 Set the connection port.
After entering the Connect window as shown in Figure 10-3, select a serial port from the
Connect drop-down list box according to the port used by the PC or the configuration terminal.
Select COM1 in this case, and click OK.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
182
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
10 Web System Configuration
Figure 10-3 Setting the connection port
Step 4 Set communication parameters.
After entering the COM1 Properties window as shown in Figure 10-4, set the communication
parameters according to the description in Table 10-1.
NOTE
In other Windows operating systems, Bits per second may be described as Baud rate; Flow control may
be described as Traffic control.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
183
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
10 Web System Configuration
Figure 10-4 Setting communication parameters for the port
Table 10-1 Communication parameters
Parameter
Value
Bit per second (Baud rate)
9600
Data bit
8
Parity check
None
Stop bit
1
Flow control (Traffic control)
None
Step 5 After the HyperTerminal is started, select File Attributes to enter the Connect Properties
window as shown in Figure 10-5. Choose the Setting tab, select Auto detect or VT100 from
the Emulation drop-down list box. Click OK to complete the setting.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
184
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
10 Web System Configuration
Figure 10-5 Selecting a terminal type
After the preceding steps are complete, press Enter. If the prompt <Quidway> is displayed, it
indicates that you have logged in to the S5700. At this time, you can enter the command to
configure and manage the S5700.
----End
10.2.2 Setting the Management IP Address of the S5700
This section describes how to configure the management IP address of the S5700.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
interface meth 0/0/1
The MEth interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
ip address ip-address { mask | mask-length } [ sub ]
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
185
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
10 Web System Configuration
The IP address of the interface is configured.
----End
10.2.3 Uploading Web Page Files
This section describes how to obtain the Web page files and upload them to the S5700 through
FTP.
Prerequisite
To obtain the Web page file of the S5700, log in to http://support.huawei.com, and then choose
Software Center > Version Software > Data Communication Product Line > Ethernet
Switch > S23&33&53&CX200D Series. Download the software package of the current
version. The Web page file is contained in the software package. The file name is Product Name
+ the Version of Software.web.zip.
Before uploading the Web page file, copy the Web page file to the client from which you log in
to the S5700.
Context
NOTE
You can also download Web files through TFTP. In this case, the S5700 functions as the TFTP client, and
the terminal that stores the Web files functions as the TFTP server. For details, see 8.5.3 Downloading
Files Through TFTP.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ftp server enable
The FTP server is enabled.
Step 3 Run:
aaa
The AAA view is displayed.
Step 4 Run:
local-user user-name
password { simple | cipher } password
An FTP client is configured and the password is set to huawei.
Step 5 Run:
local-user user-name
ftp-directory directory
The directory is set for the FTP client.
Step 6 Run:
local-user user-name
service-type ftp
The service type of an FTP login user is set.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
186
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
10 Web System Configuration
Step 7 Run the following command in the cmd view of the PC:
ftp ip-address
The user name and password are displayed. The PC can log in to the S5700.
C:\>ftp 10.1.1.132
Connected to 10.1.1.132.
220 FTP service ready.
User (10.1.1.132:(none)): client
331 Password required for client.
Password:
230 User logged in.
ftp>
Step 8 Run the following command in the FTP view:
put local-filename
The web.zip file is uploaded from the PC to the S5700.
ftp> put web.zip
200 Port command okay.
150 Opening ASCII mode data connection for web.zip.
226 Transfer complete.
ftp: 251047 bytes sent in 3.36Seconds 74.74Kbytes/sec.
ftp>
----End
10.2.4 Loading a Web Page File
This section describes how to load a Web file.
Context
Before loading the Web page file, upload it to the S5700.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
http server load file-name
The Web page file is loaded to the S5700.
----End
10.2.5 Creating a Web Account
Before logging in to the S5700 in Web mode, you need to create a Web account on the S5700.
Context
Before enabling the HTTP server,load the Web Page File to S5700.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
187
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
10 Web System Configuration
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
http server enable
The HTTP server is enabled.
Step 3 Run:
aaa
The AAA view is displayed.
Step 4 Run:
local-user user-name
password { simple | cipher } password
An HTTP client is configured and the password of the client is set.
NOTE
You are recommended to set the password in the cipher text. Simple user name and password should not
be used for the sake of security.
Step 5 Run:
local-user user-name
service-type http
The access type of the user named admin is set to HTTP.
Step 6 Run:
quit
Return to the system view.
Step 7 (Optional) Run:
http timeout timeout
The timeout period of an HTTP connection is set.
By default, the timeout period of an HTTP connection is 20 minutes.
----End
10.2.6 Logging In to the Web System
This section describes how to log in to the S5700 in Web mode.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the Web browser on the PC, and then enter the management address of the S5700 in the
address bar (the PC and the S5700 have reachable routes to each other). Then, press Enter to
display the Login dialog box. As shown in Figure 10-6, enter the pre-set Web user name,
password and verify code, and then choice the language.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
188
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
10 Web System Configuration
Figure 10-6 Login
NOTE
If you select Save my password before clicking Login, you do not need to enter the password at next
login.
Step 2 Click Login or press enter to display the homepage of the Web system.
You can configure the S5700 after logging in to the Web system. For details on how to configure
the S5700 on the Web system, see the Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches Web Network
Management System Client Operation Guide.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
189
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
11
SSL Configuration
About This Chapter
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol is used to authenticate the identities of a client and a
server and encrypt data transmitted between the client and the server. SSL ensures that only
authorized users can log in to the server.
11.1 SSL
Currently, SSL is only used for the File Transfer Protocol-SSL (FTPS) and the Hypertext
Transfer Protocol-SSL (HTTPS) applications (secure Web network management is an HTTPS
application).
11.2 SSL Features Supported by the S5700
Currently, SSL is only used for FTPS and HTTPS applications (secure Web network
management is an HTTPS application).
11.3 Configuring Login to an FTPS Server from a User Terminal
FTPS that adds support for SSL is an extension to the commonly used FTP. Using SSL to
authenticate the identities of the client and server and encrypt data to be transmitted, FTPS
implements security management of devices.
11.4 Configuring Login to an FTPS Server from an FTPS Client
The FTPS client and FTPS server authenticate each other's identities to ensure that only
authorized users can access the FTPS server, improving access security.
11.5 Configuring Secure Web Network Management
An SSL policy is configured on and a digital certificate is loaded to an HTTP server. The digital
certificate is used by a client to verify the identity of the server.
11.6 Configuration Examples
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
190
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
11.1 SSL
Currently, SSL is only used for the File Transfer Protocol-SSL (FTPS) and the Hypertext
Transfer Protocol-SSL (HTTPS) applications (secure Web network management is an HTTPS
application).
Overview
SSL is a cryptographic protocol that provides communication security over the Internet. It allows
a client and a server to communicate across a network in a way designed to prevent
eavesdropping by authenticating the server or the client. SSL has the following advantages:
l
Provides high security assurance. It uses data encryption, authentication, and a message
integrity check to ensure secure data transmission over the network.
l
Supports various application layer protocols. SSL is originally designed for securing World
Wide Web traffic. As SSL functions between the application layer and the transport layer,
it secures data transmission based on TCP connections for any application layer protocol.
l
Is easy to deploy. Currently, SSL has become a world-wide communications standard for
authenticating Web site and Web page users and encrypting data transmitted between
browser users and Web servers.
SSL improves device security from the following aspects:
l
Helps authorized users to securely access servers and prevents unauthorized users from
accessing servers.
l
Encrypts data transmitted between a client and a server for data transmission security and
computes a digest for data integrity, which implements security management for devices.
l
Defines an access control policy on a device based on certificate attributes to control the
access rights of clients, which prevents unauthorized users from attacking the device.
Basic Concepts
l
Certificate Authority (CA)
A CA is an entity that issues, manages, and abolishes digital certificates. A CA checks the
validity of digital certificate owners, signs digital certificates to prevent eavesdropping and
tampering, and manages certificates and keys. The world-wide trusted CA is called a root
CA. The root CA can authorize other CAs as subordinate CAs. The CA identity is described
in a trusted-CA file.
For example, CA1 functions as the root CA and issues a certificate for CA2, CA2 then
issues a certificate for CA3 and so on, until CAn issues the final server certificate.
If CA3 issues the server certificate, certificate authentication on the client starts from server
certificate authentication. The CA3 certificate is used to authenticate the server certificate.
If authentication succeeds, the CA2 certificate is used to authenticate the CA3 certificate.
Finally, the CA1 certificate is used to authenticate the CA2 certificate. Server certificate
authentication succeeds only when the CA2 certificate has been authenticated by the CA1
certificate.
Figure 11-1 shows the certificate issuing and authentication processes.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
191
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
Figure 11-1 Schematic diagram for certificate issuing and authentication
Certificate issuing
CA1
CA2
CAn
Server's
certificate
Certificate authentication
l
Digital certificate
A digital certificate is an electronic document which uses a digital signature to bind a public
key with an identity. The digital certificate includes information such as the name of a
person or an organization that applies for the certificate, public key, digital-signed signature
of the CA that issues the digital certificate, and validity period of the digital certificate. A
digital certificate validates the identities of two communicating parties, improving
communication reliability.
A user must obtain the public key certificate of the information sender in advance to decrypt
and authenticate information in the certificate. In addition, the user also needs the CA
certificate of the information sender to verify the identity of the information sender.
l
Certificate Revocation List (CRL)
A CRL is a list of certificates that have been revoked, and therefore should not be relied
upon. The CRL is issued by a CA.
The lifetime of a digital certificate is limited. A CA can revoke a digital certificate to shorten
its lifetime. The lifetime of a CRL is usually shorter than the lifetime of certificates in the
CRL. If a CA revokes a digital certificate, the key pair defined in the certificate can no
longer be used even if the digital certificate does not expire. After a certificate in a CRL
expires, the certificate is deleted from the CRL to shorten the CRL.
Before using a digital certificate, the client checks the CRL. If the digital certificate is in
the CRL, the corresponding CA marks the digital certificate as expired, and adds a
certificate expiration list (CEL) when issuing a new CRL. After the CEL expires, it is
automatically deleted from the CRL.
11.2 SSL Features Supported by the S5700
Currently, SSL is only used for FTPS and HTTPS applications (secure Web network
management is an HTTPS application).
FTPS
FTPS that adds support for SSL is an extension to the commonly used FTP.
Using SSL to authenticate the identities of the client and server, encrypt data to be transmitted,
and check message integrity, FTPS provides a secure FTP server access.
l
Login to an FTPS server from a user terminal
an SSL policy is configured on the FTP server. After a digital certificate is loaded and the
FTPS server function is enabled on the server, you can log in to the server from a terminal
on which the SSL-capable FTP client software is installed to securely operate files
transmitted between the terminal and the server.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
192
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
l
11 SSL Configuration
Login to an FTPS server from an FTPS client
– An SSL policy needs to be configured and a trusted-CA file needs to be loaded to an
FTP client to verify the identify of the certificate owner, sign a digital certificate to
prevent eavesdropping and tampering, and manage the certificate and key.
– An SSL policy needs to be configured on and a digital certificate needs to be loaded to
an FTP server to verify the validity of the trusted-CA file. This ensures that only
authorized clients can log in to the server.
HTTPS
HTTPS that adds support for SSL is an extension to the commonly used HTTP.
Using SSL to authenticate the identities of the client and server, encrypt data to be transmitted,
and check message integrity, HTTPS provides a secure Web access.
an SSL policy is configured on the device that functions as an HTTP server. After a digital
certificate is loaded to and the HTTPS server function is enabled on the server, users can log in
to the server to remotely manage the server using Web pages.
11.3 Configuring Login to an FTPS Server from a User
Terminal
FTPS that adds support for SSL is an extension to the commonly used FTP. Using SSL to
authenticate the identities of the client and server and encrypt data to be transmitted, FTPS
implements security management of devices.
11.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring login to an FTPS server from a user terminal, familiarize yourself with the
applicable environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for
the configuration. This will help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
Traditional FTP does not have a security mechanism. It transmits data in plain text. If the FTP
server is configured with login user names and passwords, the FTP server can authenticate
clients, but the clients cannot authenticate the server. Transmitted data is easy to be tampered,
bringing security threats.An SSL policy can be configured on the FTP server to improve security.
SSL allows data encryption, identity authentication, and message integrity verification,
improving data transmission security. In addition, SSL provides secure connections for the FTP
server, greatly improving security of the FTP server.
As shown in Figure 11-2, an SSL policy is configured on the FTP server. After a digital
certificate is loaded and the FTPS server function is enabled on the server, you can log in to the
server from a terminal on which the SSL-capable FTP client software is installed to securely
operate files transmitted between the terminal and the server.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
193
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
Figure 11-2 Networking diagram for a PC to log in to an FTPS server
Network
VLANIF10
192.168.0.1/24
FTP-Server
PC
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring login to an FTPS server from a user terminal, complete the following tasks:
l
Loading a digital certificate to the sub-directory named security of the system directory
on the FTPS server
l
Installing the SSL-capable FTP client software on the PC
Data Preparation
To configure login to an FTPS server from a user terminal, you need the following data.
No.
Data
1
SSL policy name and digital certificate
2
IP address of the FTPS server
11.3.2 Configuring an SSL Policy and Loading a Digital Certificate
A client uses a digital certificate to authenticate the identity of a server for secure communication.
Context
The FTPS server needs to obtain a digital certificate from a CA. The client that will access the
server needs the CA certificate from the CA to verify the validity of the digital certificate of the
server.
NOTE
A CA is responsible for issuing and managing digital certificates. The digital certificate to be loaded to the
FTPS server must be obtained from a corresponding CA.
A digital certificate can be in the PEM, ASN1, or PFX format. Details are as follows:
l
The PEM format is most commonly used. The file name extension of a PEM digital
certificate is .pem.
The PEM format is applicable to text transmission between systems.
l
The ASN1 format is a universal digital certificate format. The file name extension of an
ASN1 digital certificate is .der.
The ASN1 format is the default format for most browsers.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
The PFX format is a universal digital certificate format. The file name extension of a PFX
digital certificate is .pfx.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
194
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
The PFX format is a binary format that can be converted into the PEM or ASN1 format.
Perform the following steps on the device that functions as an FTPS server:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ssl policy policy-name
An SSL policy is configured and the SSL policy view is displayed.
Step 3 Load a digital certificate.
Run one of the following commands as required:
l Run:
certificate load pem-cert cert-filename key-pair { dsa | rsa } key-file keyfilename auth-code auth-code
A PEM digital certificate is loaded.
l Run:
certificate load asn1-cert cert-filename key-pair { dsa | rsa } key-file keyfilename
An ASN1 digital certificate is loaded.
l Run:
certificate load pfx-cert cert-filename key-pair { dsa | rsa } { mac mac-code |
key-file key-filename } auth-code auth-code
A PFX digital certificate is loaded.
l Run:
certificate load pem-chain cert-filename key-pair { dsa | rsa } key-file keyfilename auth-code auth-code
A PEM digital certificate chain is loaded.
NOTE
Only one certificate or certificate chain can be loaded to an SSL policy. If a certificate or certificate chain
has been loaded, unload the certificate or certificate chain before loading a new certificate or certificate
chain.
----End
11.3.3 Enabling the FTPS Function
After a device is configured with an SSL policy and enabled with the FTPS server function, the
device functions as an FTPS server to provide SSL-based FTP services.
Context
NOTE
Before enabling the FTPS server function, disable the FTP server function.
Perform the following steps on the device that functions as an FTPS server:
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
195
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ftp secure-server ssl-policy policy-name
An SSL policy is configured for the device.
Step 3 Run:
ftp secure-server enable
The FTPS server function is enabled.
By default, the FTPS server function is disabled.
----End
11.3.4 Accessing an FTPS Server
You can use a PC with the SSL-capable FTP client software or an FTPS client to access an FTPS
server for secure management of files on the FTPS server.
Before accessing an FTPS server, install the SSL-capable FTP client software on a PC, and then
use a third-party software to log in to the FTPS server from the PC to securely manage files on
the FTPS server.
11.3.5 Checking the Configuration
After the configuration of login to an FTPS server from a user terminal is complete, you can
view the SSL policy, digital certificate, and status of the FTPS server.
Prerequisite
The configurations of login to an FTPS server from a user terminal are complete.
Procedure
l
Run the display ssl policy command to check the configured SSL policy and loaded digital
certificate.
l
Run the display ftp-server command to check the SSL policy name and the FTPS server
status.
----End
Example
Run the display ssl policy command on the FTPS server. The command output shows detailed
information about the configured SSL policy and loaded digital certificate.
<Quidway> display ssl policy
SSL Policy Name: ftp_server
Policy Applicants: FTP secure-server
Key-pair Type: RSA
Certificate File Type: PEM
Certificate Type: certificate
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
196
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
Certificate Filename: 1_servercert_pem_rsa.pem
Key-file Filename: 1_serverkey_pem_rsa.pem
Auth-code: 123456
MAC:
CRL File:
Trusted-CA File:
Run the display ftp-server command on the FTP server. The command output shows that the
SSL policy name is ftp_server and the FTPS server is running.
<Quidway> display ftp-server
FTP server is stopped
Max user number
User count
Timeout value(in minute)
Listening port
Acl number
FTP server's source address
FTP SSL policy
FTP Secure-server is running
5
1
30
21
0
0.0.0.0
ftp_server
11.4 Configuring Login to an FTPS Server from an FTPS
Client
The FTPS client and FTPS server authenticate each other's identities to ensure that only
authorized users can access the FTPS server, improving access security.
11.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring login to an FTPS server from an FTPS client, familiarize yourself with the
applicable environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for
the configuration. This will help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
Traditional FTP does not have a security mechanism. It transmits data in plain text. If the FTP
server is configured with login user names and passwords, the FTP server can authenticate
clients, but the clients cannot authenticate the server. Transmitted data is easy to be tampered,
bringing security threats. To improve security, perform the following steps on the FTP client
and server:
l
Configure an SSL policy on the FTP client and load a trusted-CA file to the client.
l
Configure an SSL policy on the FTP server and load a digital certificate to the server.
The client uses the trusted-CA file and digital certificate to authenticate the server so that the
authorized client can access the correct server.
As shown in Figure 11-3,
l
An SSL policy needs to be configured and a trusted-CA file needs to be loaded to an FTP
client to verify the identify of the certificate owner, sign a digital certificate to prevent
eavesdropping and tampering, and manage the certificate and key.
l
An SSL policy needs to be configured on and a digital certificate needs to be loaded to an
FTP server to verify the validity of the trusted-CA file. This ensures that only authorized
clients can log in to the server.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
197
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
Figure 11-3 Accessing an FTPS server from an FTPS client
FTP-Client
VLANIF20
1.1.1.1/24
Network
VLANIF40
192.168.0.2/24
FTP-Server
VLANIF30
1.1.1.2/24
VLANIF10
192.168.0.1/24
PC1
PC2
If the FTPS client and server are routable, you can log in to the FTPS server from the FTPS
client to remotely manage files.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring login to an FTPS server from an FTPS client, complete the following tasks:
l
Loading a trusted-CA file to the sub-directory named security of the system directory on
the FTPS client
l
Loading a digital certificate to the sub-directory named security of the system directory
on the FTPS server
Data Preparation
To configure login to an FTPS server from an FTPS client, you need the following data.
No.
Data
1
SSL policy name, trusted-CA file, (optional) CRL file, and IP address of the FTPS
client
2
Digital certificate and IP address of the FTPS server
11.4.2 Configuring the FTPS Client
An SSL policy needs to be configured on and a trusted-CA file needs to be loaded to an FTP
client. The FTPS client can use the trusted-CA file to authenticate an FTPS server to ensure that
only authorized users can log in to the FTPS server.
Context
A trusted-CA file can be in the PEM, ASN1, or PFX format. Details are as follows:
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
The PEM format is most commonly used. The file name extension of a PEM digital
certificate is .pem.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
198
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
l
The ASN1 format is a universal digital certificate format. The file name extension of an
ASN1 digital certificate is .der.
l
The PFX format is a universal digital certificate format. The file name extension of a PFX
digital certificate is .pfx.
A CRL file can be in either the ASN1 or PEM format. These two formats represent the same
contents.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ssl policy policy-name
An SSL policy is configured and the SSL policy view is displayed.
Step 3 Load a trusted-CA file.
Run one of the following commands as required:
l Run:
trusted-ca load pem-ca ca-filename
A PEM trusted-CA file is loaded.
l Run:
trusted-ca load asn1-ca ca-filename
An ASN1 trusted-CA file is loaded.
l Run:
trusted-ca load pfx-ca ca-filename auth-code auth-code
A PFX trusted-CA file is loaded.
A maximum of four trusted-CA files can be loaded to an SSL policy. If multiple trusted-CA
files are loaded, these files will be added to the existing trusted-CA file list.
NOTE
l If the trusted-CA file configured on the FTPS server contains only one certificate, configure all the
trusted-CA certificates of upper levels to the root CA certificate on the client.
l If a certificate chain is configured on the FTPS server, configure only the root CA certificate on the
client.
Step 4 (Optional) Run:
crl load { pem-crl | asn1-crl } crl-filename
A CRL is loaded.
A maximum of two CRL files can be loaded to an SSL policy. If multiple CRL files are loaded,
these files will be added to the existing CRL file list.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
199
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
11.4.3 Configuring the FTPS Server
FTPS that adds support for SSL is an extension to the commonly used FTP. Using SSL to
authenticate the identities of the client and server and encrypt data to be transmitted, FTPS
implements security management of devices.
Context
The FTPS server needs to obtain a digital certificate from a CA. The client that will access the
server needs the CA certificate from the CA to verify the validity of the digital certificate of the
server.
NOTE
A CA is responsible for issuing and managing digital certificates. The digital certificate to be loaded to the
FTPS server must be obtained from a corresponding CA.
A digital certificate can be in the PEM, ASN1, or PFX format. Details are as follows:
l
The PEM format is most commonly used. The file name extension of a PEM digital
certificate is .pem.
The PEM format is applicable to text transmission between systems.
l
The ASN1 format is a universal digital certificate format. The file name extension of an
ASN1 digital certificate is .der.
The ASN1 format is the default format for most browsers.
l
The PFX format is a universal digital certificate format. The file name extension of a PFX
digital certificate is .pfx.
The PFX format is a binary format that can be converted into the PEM or ASN1 format.
Perform the following steps on the device that functions as an FTPS server:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ssl policy policy-name
An SSL policy is configured and the SSL policy view is displayed.
Step 3 Load a digital certificate.
Run one of the following commands as required:
l Run:
certificate load pem-cert cert-filename key-pair { dsa | rsa } key-file keyfilename auth-code auth-code
A PEM digital certificate is loaded.
l Run:
certificate load asn1-cert cert-filename key-pair { dsa | rsa } key-file keyfilename
An ASN1 digital certificate is loaded.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
200
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
l Run:
certificate load pfx-cert cert-filename key-pair { dsa | rsa } { mac mac-code |
key-file key-filename } auth-code auth-code
A PFX digital certificate is loaded.
l Run:
certificate load pem-chain cert-filename key-pair { dsa | rsa } key-file keyfilename auth-code auth-code
A PEM digital certificate chain is loaded.
NOTE
Only one certificate or certificate chain can be loaded to an SSL policy. If a certificate or certificate chain
has been loaded, unload the certificate or certificate chain before loading a new certificate or certificate
chain.
Step 4 Run:
ftp secure-server ssl-policy policy-name
An SSL policy is configured for the device.
Step 5 Run:
ftp secure-server enable
The FTPS server function is enabled.
By default, the FTPS server function is disabled.
NOTE
Before enabling the FTPS server function, disable the FTP server function.
----End
11.4.4 Accessing an FTPS Server
You can use specified commands to log in to an FTPS server from an FTPS client to remotely
manage the FTPS server.
Procedure
l
On an IPv4 network:
In the user view, run:
ftp ssl-policy policy-name [ [ -a source-ip-address | -i interface-type
interface-number ] host [ port-number ] [ public-net | vpn-instance vpninstance-name ] ]
A control connection is established with a remote FTPS server and the FTP client view is
displayed.
l
On an IPv6 network:
In the user view, run:
ftp ssl-policy policy-name ipv6 host [ port-number ]
A control connection is established with a remote FTPS server and the FTP client view is
displayed.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
201
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
Follow-up Procedure
The client can log in to the server only after the entered user name and password are authenticated
by the server. After logging in to the FTPS server, you can operate files on the FTPS server in
the same way as that on an FTP server. Table 11-1 lists file operations on an FTP server.
Table 11-1 File operations
File Operation
Operation
Managin
g files
l Run the ascii command to set the file type to ASCII.
Configuring the
file type
l Run the binary command to set the file type to binary.
The FTP file type is determined by the client. By default,
the ASCII type is used.
Configuring the
data connection
mode
l Run the passive command to set the data connection
mode to PASV.
l Run the undo passive command to set the data
connection mode to PORT.
By default, the PASV mode is used.
Uploading files
l Run the put local-filename [ remote-filename ]
command to upload a file from the local device to a
remote server.
l Run the mput local-filenames command to upload files
from the local device to a remote server.
Downloading
files
l Run the get remote-filename [ local-filename ] command
to download a file from a remote server and save the file
on the local device.
l Run the mget remote-filenames command to download
files from a remote server and save the files on the local
device.
Enabling the file
transfer prompt
function
l If the prompt command is run in the FTP client view to
enable the file transfer prompt function, the system
prompts you to confirm the uploading or downloading
operation during file uploading or downloading.
l If the prompt command is run again in the FTP client
view, the file transfer prompt function is disabled.
NOTE
The prompt command is applicable to the scenario where the
mput or mget command is used to upload or download files. If the
local device has the files to be downloaded by running the mget
command, the system prompts you whether to override the existing
ones regardless of whether the file transfer prompt function is
enabled.
Enabling the FTP
verbose function
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Run the verbose command.
After the verbose function is enabled, all FTP response
information is displayed. After file transfer is complete,
statistics about the transmission rate are displayed.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
202
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
File Operation
Operation
Managin
g
directori
es
Changing the
working path of a
remote FTP server
Run the cd pathname command.
Changing the
working path of an
FTP server to the
parent directory
Run the cdup command.
Displaying the
working path of an
FTP server
Run the pwd command.
Displaying files in
the directory and
the list of subdirectories
Run the dir [ remote-directory [ local-filename ] ] command.
Displaying a
specified remote
directory or file on
an FTP server
Run the ls [ remote-directory [ local-filename ] ] command.
Displaying or
changing the
working path of an
FTP client
Run the lcd [ directory ] command.
Creating a
directory on an
FTP server
Run the mkdir remote-directory command.
Deleting a
directory from an
FTP server
Run the rmdir remote-directory command.
If no path name is specified for a specified remote file, the
system will search the file in the authorized directory of the
user.
The lcd command displays the local working path of the FTP
client, whereas the pwd command displays the working path
of the remote FTP server.
The directory can be a combination of letters and numbers,
excluding special characters such as "<", ">", "?", "\", or ":".
Displaying online help for an
FTP command
Run the remotehelp [ command ] command.
Changing an FTP user
Run the user username [ password ] command.
11.4.5 Checking the Configuration
After the configuration of login to an FTPS server from an FTPS client is complete, you can
view the FTPS client, SSL policy configured on the FTPS server, trusted-CA file loaded to the
FTPS client, and digital certificate loaded to the FTPS server.
Prerequisite
The configurations of login to an FTPS server from an FTPS client are complete.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
203
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
Procedure
l
Run the display ssl policy command to check the SSL policy configured on and trustedCA certificate loaded to the FTPS client as well as the SSL policy configured on and digital
certificate loaded to the FTPS server.
l
Run the display ftp-server command to check the SSL policy name and the FTPS server
status.
----End
Example
Run the display ssl policy command on the FTPS client. The command output shows detailed
information about the configured SSL policy and loaded trusted-CA file.
<Quidway> display ssl policy
SSL Policy Name: ftp_client
Policy Applicants:
Key-pair Type:
Certificate File Type:
Certificate Type:
Certificate Filename:
Key-file Filename:
Auth-code:
MAC:
CRL File:
Trusted-CA File:
Trusted-CA File 1: Format = PEM, Filename = 1_cacert_pem_rsa.pem
Trusted-CA File 2: Format = PEM, Filename = 1_rootcert_pem_rsa.pem
Run the display ssl policy command on the FTPS server. The command output shows detailed
information about the configured SSL policy and loaded digital certificate.
<Quidway> display ssl policy
SSL Policy Name: ftp_server
Policy Applicants: FTP secure-server
Key-pair Type: RSA
Certificate File Type: PEM
Certificate Type: certificate
Certificate Filename: 1_servercert_pem_rsa.pem
Key-file Filename: 1_serverkey_pem_rsa.pem
Auth-code: 123456
MAC:
CRL File:
Trusted-CA File:
Run the display ftp-server command on the FTP server. The command output shows that the
SSL policy name is ftp_server and the FTPS server is running.
<Quidway> display ftp-server
FTP server is stopped
Max user number
User count
Timeout value(in minute)
Listening port
Acl number
FTP server's source address
FTP SSL policy
FTP Secure-server is running
5
1
30
21
0
0.0.0.0
ftp_server
11.5 Configuring Secure Web Network Management
An SSL policy is configured on and a digital certificate is loaded to an HTTP server. The digital
certificate is used by a client to verify the identity of the server.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
204
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
11.5.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring an HTTPS server, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for the configuration. This
will help you complete the configuration task quickly and efficiently.
Applicable Environment
After a device that supports Web network management is enabled with the HTTP function, the
device can function as a Web server. Users can log in to the device using HTTP and use Web
pages to access and control the device. HTTP does not provide a mechanism that allows users
to authenticate a Web server or protects privacy of data transmission. To address this problem,
you can configure HTTPS on the device. HTTPS that adds support for SSL is an extension to
the commonly used HTTP. SSL allows the client and server to authenticate each other and
encrypts data to be transmitted.
As shown in Figure 11-4, an SSL policy is configured on the device that functions as an HTTP
server. After a digital certificate is loaded to and the HTTPS server function is enabled on the
server, users can log in to the server to remotely manage the server using Web pages.
Figure 11-4 Networking diagram for accessing another device by using HTTPS
Network
VLANIF10
192.168.0.1/24
HTTP-Server
PC
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring an HTTPS server, complete the following tasks:
l
Uploading a digital certificate to a device that will function as an HTTPS server and copying
the certificate to the sub-directory named security of the system directory on the HTTPS
server
l
Installing a Web browser on a PC
Data Preparation
To configure an HTTPS server, you need the following data.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
No.
Data
1
SSL policy name and digital certificate
2
IP address, Web page file, and Web account of the HTTPS server
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
205
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
11.5.2 Configuring an SSL Policy and Loading a Digital Certificate
A digital certificate is used to authenticate the identities of both the user terminal and the HTTPS
server to ensure secure communication.
Context
Before using HTTPS to securely manage files, the HTTPS server needs to obtain a digital
certificate from a CA. The digital certificate is used to authenticate clients. This ensures that
only authorized clients can log in to the HTTPS server.
NOTE
A CA is responsible for issuing and managing digital certificates. The digital certificate to be loaded to the
HTTPS server can be generated using a third-party tool such as OpenSSL. OpenSSL can be considered as
a CA. For the procedure for generating a digital certificate, see the OpenSSL usage guide.
The digital certificate includes information such as the name of a person or an organization that
applies for the certificate, public key, digital-signed signature of the CA that issues the digital
certificate, and validity period of the digital certificate. A CA can issue a certificate chain along
with a digital certificate. After receiving a certificate chain, the receiver owns all the certificates
on the chain.
A digital certificate can be in the PEM, ASN1, or PFX format. Details are as follows:
l
The PEM format is most commonly used. The file name extension of a PEM digital
certificate is .pem. A PEM certificate contains only a public key but not a private key, and
the public key is usually encrypted.
The PEM format is applicable to text transmission between systems.
l
The ASN1 format is a universal digital certificate format. The file name extension of an
ASN1 digital certificate is .der. An ANS1 certificate contains only a public key but not a
private key, and the public key is not encrypted.
The ASN1 format is the default format for most browsers.
l
The PFX format is a universal digital certificate format. The file name extension of a PFX
digital certificate is .pfx. A PFX certificate can contain a private key, and the key is usually
encrypted.
The PFX format is a binary format that can be converted into the PEM or ASN1 format.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ssl policy policy-name
An SSL policy is configured.
Step 3 Load a digital certificate.
Run one of the following commands as required:
l Run:
certificate load pem-cert cert-filename key-pair { dsa | rsa } key-file keyfilename auth-code auth-code
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
206
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
A PEM digital certificate is loaded.
l Run:
certificate load asn1-cert cert-filename key-pair { dsa | rsa } key-file keyfilename
An ASN1 digital certificate is loaded.
l Run:
certificate load pfx-cert cert-filename key-pair { dsa | rsa } { mac mac-code |
key-file key-filename } auth-code auth-code
A PFX digital certificate is loaded.
l Run:
certificate load pem-chain cert-filename key-pair { dsa | rsa } key-file keyfilename auth-code auth-code
A PEM digital certificate chain is loaded.
NOTE
Only one certificate or certificate chain can be loaded to an SSL policy. If a certificate or certificate chain
has been loaded, unload the certificate or certificate chain before loading a new certificate or certificate
chain.
----End
11.5.3 Loading a Web Page File
To manage and maintain a device on a graphical user interface (GUI), you can configure the
Web network management function. Before using the Web network management function, load
the related Web page file.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
http server load file-name
A Web page file is loaded.
----End
11.5.4 Enabling the HTTPS Function
After a device is configured with an SSL policy and enabled with the HTTPS function, the device
functions as an HTTPS server to provide SSL-based HTTP services.
Context
NOTE
Before enabling the HTTPS server function, disable the HTTP server function.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
207
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
http secure-server ssl-policy policy-name
An SSL policy is configured for a device.
Step 3 Run:
http secure-server enable
The HTTPS server function is enabled.
By default, the HTTPS server function is disabled.
Step 4 (Optional) Run:
http secure-server port port-number
The listening port number is configured for the HTTPS server.
The default listening port number of the HTTPS server is 443. When using the default listening
port number to access and control the HTTPS server, you do not need to specify the port number
in commands. Attackers may access the default listening port, consuming bandwidth, affecting
performance of the server, and causing authorized users unable to access the server. To improve
security, run this command to change the listening port number of the HTTPS server. After that,
attackers are deprived of information about the newly configured listening port number, and the
HTTPS server is thus well protected.
----End
11.5.5 Creating a Web Account
Setting the HTTP user name and password is recommended for secure login to a Web server.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
aaa
The AAA view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
local-user user-name password { simple | cipher } password
The HTTP user name and password are set.
NOTE
Setting the password in cipher text is recommended. Simple user names and passwords are insecure.
Step 4 Run:
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
208
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
local-user user-name service-type http
HTTP is configured as the service type.
----End
11.5.6 Logging In to the Web System
After logging in to the Web system, you can manage and maintain a device on a GUI.
Open the Web browser on the PC. Enter the IP address of the HTTPS server in the address bar.
Press Enter and the dialog box shown in Figure 11-5 is displayed.
Figure 11-5 Login GUI
Enter the HTTP user name, password, and verification code. Click Login or press Enter to enter
the Web system.
11.5.7 Checking the Configuration
After secure Web network management is configured, you can view the configured SSL policy
and loaded digital certificate on the HTTPS server as well as the HTTPS server status.
Prerequisite
The configurations of secure Web network management are complete.
Procedure
l
Run the display ssl policy command to check the configured SSL policy and loaded digital
certificate.
l
Run the display http server command to check the SSL policy name and the HTTPS server
status.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
209
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
Example
Run the display ssl policy command. The command output shows detailed information about
the configured SSL policy and loaded digital certificate.
<Quidway> display ssl policy
SSL Policy Name: http_server
Policy Applicants: WEB secure-server
Key-pair Type: RSA
Certificate File Type: PEM
Certificate Type: certificate
Certificate Filename: 1_servercert_pem_rsa.pem
Key-file Filename: 1_serverkey_pem_rsa.pem
Auth-code: 123456
MAC:
CRL File:
Trusted-CA File:
Run the display http server command. The command output shows the SSL policy name and
the HTTPS server status.
<Quidway> display http server
HTTP Server Status
HTTP Server Port
HTTP Timeout Interval
Current Online Users
Maximum Users Allowed
HTTP Secure-server Status
HTTP Secure-server Port
HTTP SSL Policy
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
disabled
80(80)
20
0
5
enabled
443(443)
http_server
11.6 Configuration Examples
11.6.1 Example for Configuring Login to an FTPS Server from a User
Terminal
You can use a terminal on which the SSL-capable FTP client software is installed to log in to
an FTPS server to securely operate files transmitted between the terminal and the server.
Networking Requirements
Traditional FTP does not have a security mechanism. It transmits data in plain text. If the FTP
server is configured with login user names and passwords, the FTP server can authenticate
clients, but the clients cannot authenticate the server. Transmitted data is easy to be tampered,
bringing security threats.An SSL policy can be configured on the FTP server to improve security.
SSL allows data encryption, identity authentication, and message integrity verification,
improving data transmission security. In addition, SSL provides secure connections for the FTP
server, greatly improving security of the FTP server.
As shown in Figure 11-6, an SSL policy is configured on the FTP server. After a digital
certificate is loaded and the FTPS server function is enabled on the server, you can log in to the
server from a terminal on which the SSL-capable FTP client software is installed to securely
operate files transmitted between the terminal and the server.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
210
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
Figure 11-6 Operating files using FTPS
Network
VLANIF10
192.168.0.1/24
FTP-Server
PC
Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1.
Upload a digital certificate.
Upload the digital certificate saved on the PC to the FTP server.
2.
Load the digital certificate.
Copy the digital certificate from the system directory of the FTP server to the sub-directory
named security, configure an SSL policy, and load the digital certificate.
3.
Enable the FTPS server function.
4.
Install the SSL-capable FTP client software on the PC
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l
IP address of the FTP server
l
FTP user name and password
l
SSL digital certificate
Procedure
Step 1 Upload a digital certificate.
# Configure an IP address for the FTP server so that the PC and FTP server are routable.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname FTP-Server
[FTP-Server] interface gigabitethernet0/0/1
[FTP-Server-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port link-type access
[FTP-Server-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] quit
[FTP-Server] vlan 10
[FTP-Server-vlan10] port gigabitethernet0/0/1
[FTP-Server-vlan10] quit
[FTP-Server] interface vlanif 10
[FTP-Server-Vlanif10] ip address 192.168.0.1 24
[FTP-Server-Vlanif10] quit
# Enable the FTP server function.
[FTP-Server] ftp server enable
# Configure the authentication information, authorization mode, and authorized directory for an
FTP user on the FTP server.
[FTP-Server] aaa
[FTP-Server-aaa] local-user huawei password simple huawei
[FTP-Server-aaa] local-user huawei service-type ftp
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
211
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
[FTP-Server-aaa] local-user huawei ftp-directory flash:
[FTP-Server-aaa] quit
[FTP-Server] quit
# Run the ftp ftp-server-address commands at the Windows command prompt. Enter the correct
user name and password to set up an FTP connection to the FTP server, as shown in Figure
11-7.
Figure 11-7 Logging in to an FTP server from a user terminal
Upload the digital certificate saved on the user terminal to the FTP server, as shown in Figure
11-8.
Figure 11-8 Uploading a digital certificate
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
212
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
After the preceding configurations are complete, run the dir command on the FTP server. The
command output shows that the digital certificate has been successfully uploaded to the server.
<FTP-Server> dir
Directory of flash:/
Idx
Attr
0 drw1 -rw2 -rw3 -rw4 -rw-
Size(Byte)
Date
May
May
May
May
May
524,575
446
1,302
951
10
10
10
10
10
Time(LMT) FileName
2011 05:05:40
src
2011 05:05:53
private-data.txt
2011 05:05:51
vrpcfg.zip
2011 05:32:05
1_servercert_pem_rsa.pem
2011 05:32:44
1_serverkey_pem_rsa.pem
304,292 KB total (303,770 KB free)
Step 2 Configure an SSL policy and load the digital certificate.
# Create a sub-directory named security and copy the digital certificate to this sub-directory.
<FTP-Server> mkdir security/
<FTP-Server> copy 1_servercert_pem_rsa.pem security/
<FTP-Server> copy 1_serverkey_pem_rsa.pem security/
After the preceding configurations are complete, run the dir command in the security subdirectory on the FTP server. The command output shows that the digital certificate has been
successfully uploaded to the server.
<FTP-Server> cd security/
<FTP-Server> dir
Directory of flash:/security/
Idx
0
1
Attr
-rw-rw-
Size(Byte)
1,302
951
Date
Time(LMT)
May 10 2011 05:44:34
May 10 2011 05:45:22
FileName
1_servercert_pem_rsa.pem
1_serverkey_pem_rsa.pem
304,292 KB total (303,766 KB free)
# Create an SSL policy and load the PEM digital certificate.
<FTP-Server> system-view
[FTP-Server] ssl policy ftp_server
[FTP-Server-ssl-policy-ftp_server] certificate load pem-cert
1_servercert_pem_rsa.pem key-pair rsa key-file 1_serverkey_pem_rsa.pem auth-code
123456
[FTP-Server-ssl-policy-ftp_server] quit
Step 3 Enable the FTPS server function.
NOTE
Before enabling the FTPS server function, disable the FTP server function.
[FTP-Server] undo ftp server
[FTP-Server] ftp secure-server ssl-policy ftp_server
[FTP-Server] ftp secure-server enable
Step 4 Install the SSL-capable FTP client software on the PC.
For details about the operation procedure, see the help document about the third-party software.
Step 5 Verify the configuration.
# Run the display ssl policy command on the FTPS server. The command output shows detailed
information about the loaded certificate.
[FTP-Server] display ssl policy
SSL Policy Name: ftp_server
Policy Applicants: FTP secure-server
Key-pair Type: RSA
Certificate File Type: PEM
Certificate Type: certificate
Certificate Filename: 1_servercert_pem_rsa.pem
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
213
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
Key-file Filename: 1_serverkey_pem_rsa.pem
Auth-code: 123456
MAC:
CRL File:
Trusted-CA File:
# Run the display ftp-server command on the FTPS server. The command output shows that
the configured SSL policy name is ftp_server and the FTPS server is running.
[FTP-Server] display ftp-server
FTP server is stopped
Max user number
User count
Timeout value(in minute)
Listening port
Acl number
FTP server's source address
FTP SSL policy
FTP Secure-server is running
5
1
30
21
0
0.0.0.0
ftp_server
You can establish a connection with the FTPS server using the SSL-capable FTP client software
and upload files to and download files from the server.
----End
Configuration Files
Configuration file of the FTPS server
#
sysname FTP-Server
#
FTP secure-server enable
ftp secure-server ssl-policy ftp_server
#
vlan batch 10
#
ssl policy ftp_server
certificate load pem-cert 1_servercert_pem_rsa.pem key-pair rsa key-file
1_serverkey_pem_rsa.pem auth-code 123456
#
aaa
authentication-scheme default
authorization-scheme default
accounting-scheme default
local-user huawei password simple huawei
local-user huawei service-type ftp
local-user huawei ftp-directory flash:/
#
interface Vlanif10
ip address 192.168.0.1 255.255.255.0
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port link-type access
port default vlan 10
#
return
11.6.2 Example for Configuring Login to an FTPS Server from an
FTPS Client
You can log in to an FTPS server from an FTPS client to operate files transmitted between the
server and the client.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
214
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
Networking Requirements
Traditional FTP does not have a security mechanism. It transmits data in plain text. If the FTP
server is configured with login user names and passwords, the FTP server can authenticate
clients, but the clients cannot authenticate the server. Transmitted data is easy to be tampered,
bringing security threats.An SSL policy can be configured on the FTP server to improve security.
SSL allows data encryption, identity authentication, and message integrity verification,
improving data transmission security. In addition, SSL provides secure connections for the FTP
server, greatly improving security of the FTP server.
As shown in Figure 11-9,
l
An SSL policy needs to be configured and a trusted-CA file needs to be loaded to an FTP
client to verify the identify of the certificate owner, sign a digital certificate to prevent
eavesdropping and tampering, and manage the certificate and key.
l
An SSL policy needs to be configured on and a digital certificate needs to be loaded to an
FTP server to verify the validity of the trusted-CA file. This ensures that only authorized
clients can log in to the server.
Figure 11-9 Accessing an FTPS server from an FTPS client
FTP-Client
VLANIF20
1.1.1.1/24
Network
VLANIF40
192.168.0.2/24
FTP-Server
VLANIF30
1.1.1.2/24
VLANIF10
192.168.0.1/24
PC1
PC2
If the FTPS client and server are routable, you can log in to the FTPS server from the FTPS
client to remotely manage files.
Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1.
Upload certificates.
l Upload the digital certificate saved on PC2 to the FTP server.
l Upload the trusted-CA file saved on PC1 to the FTP client.
2.
Load the certificates and configure SSL policies.
l Copy the digital certificate from the system directory of the FTP server to the
security sub-directory, configure an SSL policy, and load the digital certificate.
l Copy the trusted-CA file from the system directory of the FTP client to the security
sub-directory, configure an SSL policy, and load the trusted-CA file.
3.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Enable the FTPS server function on the FTP server.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
215
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
4.
Configure IP addresses for the interfaces that interconnect the FTP client and server to
ensure that the client and server are routable.
5.
Run the ftp command on the FTP client to log in to the FTPS server to remotely manage
files.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l
IP addresses of the FTP client and server
l
FTP user name and password
l
SSL trusted-CA file and digital certificate
Procedure
Step 1 Upload certificates.
l Perform the following steps on the FTP server:
# Configure an IP address for the FTP server so that the PC and FTP server are routable.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname FTP-Server
[FTP-Server] interface gigabitethernet0/0/1
[FTP-Server-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port link-type access
[FTP-Server-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] quit
[FTP-Server] vlan 10
[FTP-Server-vlan10] port gigabitethernet0/0/1
[FTP-Server-vlan10] quit
[FTP-Server] interface vlanif 10
[FTP-Server-Vlanif10] ip address 192.168.0.1 24
[FTP-Server-Vlanif10] quit
# Enable the FTP server function.
[FTP-Server] ftp server enable
# Configure the authentication information, authorization mode, and authorized directory for
an FTP user on the FTP server.
[FTP-Server] aaa
[FTP-Server-aaa] local-user huawei password simple huawei
[FTP-Server-aaa] local-user huawei service-type ftp
[FTP-Server-aaa] local-user huawei ftp-directory flash:
[FTP-Server-aaa] quit
[FTP-Server] quit
# Run the ftp ftp-server-address commands at the Windows command prompt. Enter the
correct user name and password to set up an FTP connection to the FTP server, as shown in
Figure 11-10.
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
216
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
Figure 11-10 Logging in to an FTP server from a user terminal
Upload the digital certificate saved on the user terminal to the FTP server, as shown in Figure
11-11.
Figure 11-11 Uploading a digital certificate
After the preceding configurations are complete, run the dir command on the FTP server.
The command output shows that the digital certificate has been successfully uploaded to the
server.
<FTP-Server> dir
Directory of flash:/
Idx
0
1
2
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Attr
drw-rw-rw-
Size(Byte)
524,575
446
Date
Time(LMT)
May 10 2011 05:05:40
May 10 2011 05:05:53
May 10 2011 05:05:51
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
FileName
src
private-data.txt
vrpcfg.zip
217
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
3
4
5
11 SSL Configuration
-rw-rwdrw-
1,302
951
-
May 10 2011 05:32:05
May 10 2011 05:32:44
May 10 2011 05:43:39
1_servercert_pem_rsa.pem
1_serverkey_pem_rsa.pem
security
304,292 KB total (303,766 KB free)
l Perform the following steps on the FTP client:
The procedure for uploading the trusted-CA file to the FTP client is similar to the procedure
for uploading the digital certificate to the FTP server. For detailed configurations, see the
configuration file of the FTP client in this example.
After the trusted-CA file is uploaded to the FTP client, run the dir command on the FTP
client. The command output shows that the trusted-CA file has been successfully uploaded
to the FTP client.
<FTP-Client> dir
Directory of flash:/
Idx
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Attr
-rw-rw-rwdrw-rw-rwdrw-rwdrwdrw-
Size(Byte)
524,558
1,237
1,241
421
1,308,478
4
-
Date
May 10
May 10
May 10
Apr 09
Apr 09
Apr 14
Apr 10
Apr 19
Apr 11
Apr 13
2011
2011
2011
2011
2011
2011
2011
2011
2011
2011
Time(LMT)
04:50:39
05:55:33
05:55:44
19:46:14
19:46:14
19:22:45
01:35:54
04:24:28
16:18:53
11:37:40
FileName
private-data.txt
1_cacert_pem_rsa.pem
1_rootcert_pem_rsa.pem
src
vrpcfg.zip
web.zip
logfile
snmpnotilog.txt
security
lam
304,292 KB total (300,270 KB free)
Step 2 Load the certificates and configure SSL policies.
l Perform the following steps on the FTP server:
# Create a sub-directory named security and copy the digital certificate to this sub-directory.
<FTP-Server> mkdir security/
<FTP-Server> copy 1_servercert_pem_rsa.pem security/
<FTP-Server> copy 1_serverkey_pem_rsa.pem security/
After the preceding configurations are complete, run the dir command in the security subdirectory on the FTP server. The command output shows that the digital certificate has been
successfully uploaded to the server.
<FTP-Server> cd security/
<FTP-Server> dir
Directory of flash:/security/
Idx
0
1
Attr
-rw-rw-
Size(Byte)
1,302
951
Date
Time(LMT)
May 10 2011 05:44:34
May 10 2011 05:45:22
FileName
1_servercert_pem_rsa.pem
1_serverkey_pem_rsa.pem
304,292 KB total (303,766 KB free)
# Create an SSL policy and load the PEM digital certificate.
<FTP-Server> system-view
[FTP-Server] ssl policy ftp_server
[FTP-Server-ssl-policy-ftp_server] certificate load pem-cert
1_servercert_pem_rsa.pem key-pair rsa key-file 1_serverkey_pem_rsa.pem authcode 123456
[FTP-Server-ssl-policy-ftp_server] quit
After the preceding configurations are complete, run the display ssl policy command on the
FTP server. The command output shows detailed information about the loaded certificate.
[FTP-Server] display ssl policy
SSL Policy Name: ftp_server
Policy Applicants: FTP secure-server
Key-pair Type: RSA
Certificate File Type: PEM
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
218
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
Certificate Type:
Certificate Filename:
Key-file Filename:
Auth-code:
MAC:
CRL File:
Trusted-CA File:
certificate
1_servercert_pem_rsa.pem
1_serverkey_pem_rsa.pem
123456
l Configure the FTP client.
# Create a sub-directory named security and copy the trusted-CA file to this sub-directory.
The configuration procedure is similar to that on the FTP server. For detailed configurations,
see the configuration file of the FTP client in this example.
After the trusted-CA file is copied to the security sub-directory, run the dir command in this
sub-directory. The command output shows that the trusted-CA file has been successfully
copied to this sub-directory.
<FTP-Client> cd security/
<FTP-Client> dir
Directory of flash:/security/
Idx
0
1
Attr
-rw-rw-
Size(Byte)
1,237
1,241
Date
Time(LMT)
May 10 2011 05:57:15
May 10 2011 05:57:29
FileName
1_cacert_pem_rsa.pem
1_rootcert_pem_rsa.pem
304,292 KB total (300,266 KB free)
# Create an SSL policy and load the trusted-CA file.
<FTP-Client> system-view
[FTP-Client] ssl policy ftp_client
[FTP-Client-ssl-policy-ftp_client] trusted-ca load pem-ca 1_cacert_pem_rsa.pem
[FTP-Client-ssl-policy-ftp_client] trusted-ca load pem-ca 1_rootcert_pem_rsa.pem
[FTP-Client-ssl-policy-ftp_client] quit
After the preceding configurations are complete, run the display ssl policy command on the
FTP client. The command output shows detailed information about the trusted-CA file.
[FTP-Client] display ssl policy
SSL Policy Name: ftp_client
Policy Applicants:
Key-pair Type:
Certificate File Type:
Certificate Type:
Certificate Filename:
Key-file Filename:
Auth-code:
MAC:
CRL File:
Trusted-CA File:
Trusted-CA File 1: Format = PEM, Filename = 1_cacert_pem_rsa.pem
Trusted-CA File 2: Format = PEM, Filename = 1_rootcert_pem_rsa.pem
Step 3 Enable the FTPS server function.
NOTE
Before enabling the FTPS server function, disable the FTP server function.
[FTP-Server] undo ftp server
[FTP-Server] ftp secure-server ssl-policy ftp_server
[FTP-Server] ftp secure-server enable
Step 4 Configure IP addresses for the interfaces that interconnect the FTP client and server.
# Configure the FTP server.
[FTP-Server] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/2
[FTP-Server-GigabitEthernet0/0/2] port link-type access
[FTP-Server-GigabitEthernet0/0/2] quit
[FTP-Server] vlan 30
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
219
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
[FTP-Server-vlan30] port gigabitethernet 0/0/2
[FTP-Server-vlan30] quit
[FTP-Server] interface vlanif 30
[FTP-Server-Vlanif30] ip address 1.1.1.2 24
[FTP-Server-Vlanif30] quit
# Configure the FTP client.
[FTP-Client] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/2
[FTP-Client-GigabitEthernet0/0/2] port link-type access
[FTP-Client-GigabitEthernet0/0/2] quit
[FTP-Client] vlan 20
[FTP-Client-vlan20] port gigabitethernet 0/0/2
[FTP-Client-vlan20] quit
[FTP-Client] interface vlanif 20
[FTP-Client-Vlanif20] ip address 1.1.1.1 24
[FTP-Client-Vlanif20] quit
[FTP-Client] quit
Step 5 Run the ftp command on the FTP client to log in to the FTPS server to remotely manage files.
<FTP-Client> ftp ssl-policy ftp_client 1.1.1.2
Trying 1.1.1.2 ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected to 1.1.1.2.
220 FTP service ready.
234 AUTH command successfully, Security mechanism accepted.
200 PBSZ is ok.
200 Data channel security level is changed to private.
User(1.1.1.2:(none)):huawei
331 Password required for huawei.
Enter password:
230 User logged in.
[ftp]
The client can log in to the FTP server only after the correct user name and password are entered.
Step 6 Verify the configuration.
# Run the display ftp-server command on the FTPS server. The command output shows that
the configured SSL policy name is ftp_server and the FTPS server is running.
[FTP-Server] display ftp-server
FTP server is stopped
Max user number
User count
Timeout value(in minute)
Listening port
Acl number
FTP server's source address
FTP SSL policy
FTP Secure-server is running
5
1
30
21
0
0.0.0.0
ftp_server
You can use the FTP client to remotely manage files on the FTPS server.
----End
Configuration Files
l
Configuration file of the FTP server
#
sysname FTP-Server
#
FTP secure-server enable
ftp secure-server ssl-policy ftp_server
#
vlan batch 10 30
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
220
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
#
ssl policy ftp_server
certificate load pem-cert 1_servercert_pem_rsa.pem key-pair rsa key-file
1_serverkey_pem_rsa.pem auth-code 123456
#
aaa
authentication-scheme default
authorization-scheme default
accounting-scheme default
local-user huawei password simple huawei
local-user huawei service-type ftp
local-user huawei ftp-directory flash:/
#
interface Vlanif10
ip address 192.168.0.1 255.255.255.0
#
interface Vlanif30
ip address 1.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port link-type access
port default vlan 10
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2
port link-type access
port default vlan 30
#
return
l
Configuration file of the FTP client
#
sysname FTP-Client
#
FTP server enable
#
vlan batch 20 40
#
ssl policy ftp_client
trusted-ca load pem-ca 1_cacert_pem_rsa.pem
trusted-ca load pem-ca 1_rootcert_pem_rsa.pem
#
aaa
authentication-scheme default
authorization-scheme default
accounting-scheme default
local-user huawei password simple huawei
local-user huawei service-type ftp
local-user huawei ftp-directory flash:/
#
interface Vlanif20
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
#
interface Vlanif40
ip address 192.168.0.2 255.255.255.0
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port link-type access
port default vlan 40
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2
port link-type access
port default vlan 20
#
return
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
221
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
11.6.3 Example for Configuring Secure Web Network Management
Using SSL to authenticate the identities of the client and server, encrypt data to be transmitted,
and check message integrity, secure Web network management provides a secure Web access.
Networking Requirements
After a device that supports Web network management is enabled with the HTTP function, the
device can function as a Web server. Users can log in to the device using HTTP and use Web
pages to access and control the device. HTTP does not provide a mechanism that allows users
to authenticate a Web server or protects privacy of data transmission. To address this problem,
you can configure HTTPS on the device. HTTPS that adds support for SSL is an extension to
the commonly used HTTP. SSL allows the client and server to authenticate each other and
encrypts data to be transmitted.
As shown in Figure 11-12, an SSL policy is configured on the device that functions as an HTTP
server. After a digital certificate is loaded to and the HTTPS server function is enabled on the
server, users can log in to the server to remotely manage the server using Web pages.
Figure 11-12 Networking diagram for accessing another device by using HTTPS
Network
VLANIF10
192.168.0.1/24
HTTP-Server
PC
Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1.
Upload a digital certificate and a Web page file.
Upload the digital certificate and Web page file saved on the PC to the device that functions
as an HTTP server.
2.
Load the digital certificate.
Copy the digital certificate from the system directory of the HTTP server to the security
sub-directory, configure an SSL policy, and load the digital certificate.
3.
Load the Web page file.
4.
Create a Web account.
5.
Log in to the Web system.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l
IP addresses of the HTTP server
l
HTTP user name and password
l
SSL digital certificate
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
222
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
l
l
11 SSL Configuration
Web account
Web page file
Procedure
Step 1 Upload the digital certificate and Web page file.
# Configure an IP address for the device that functions as an HTTP server so that the PC and
HTTP server are routable.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname HTTP-Server
[HTTP-Server] interface gigabitethernet0/0/1
[HTTP-Server-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port link-type access
[HTTP-Server-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] quit
[HTTP-Server] vlan 10
[HTTP-Server-vlan10] port gigabitethernet0/0/1
[HTTP-Server-vlan10] quit
[HTTP-Server] interface vlanif 10
[HTTP-Server-Vlanif10] ip address 192.168.0.1 24
[HTTP-Server-Vlanif10] quit
# Enable the FTP server function.
[HTTP-Server] ftp server enable
# Configure the authentication information, authorization mode, and authorized directory for
FTP users.
[HTTP-Server] aaa
[HTTP-Server-aaa] local-user huawei password simple huawei
[HTTP-Server-aaa] local-user huawei service-type ftp
[HTTP-Server-aaa] local-user huawei ftp-directory flash:
[HTTP-Server-aaa] quit
[HTTP-Server] quit
# Upload the digital certificate and Web page file from the PC to the HTTP server, as shown in
Figure 11-13.
Figure 11-13 Uploading a digital certificate
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
223
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
After the preceding configurations are complete, run the dir command on the HTTP server. The
command output shows that the digital certificate and Web page file have been successfully
uploaded to the server.
<HTTP-Server> dir
Directory of flash:/
Idx
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Attr
-rw-rw-rwdrw-rw-rwdrw-rwdrwdrw-
Size(Byte)
524,558
1,302
951
421
1,308,478
4
-
Date
Apr 14
Apr 14
Apr 14
Apr 09
Apr 09
Apr 14
Apr 10
Apr 14
Apr 11
Apr 13
2011
2011
2011
2011
2011
2011
2011
2011
2011
2011
Time(LMT)
16:24:39
19:22:30
19:22:35
19:46:14
19:46:14
19:22:45
01:35:54
04:56:35
16:18:53
11:37:40
FileName
private-data.txt
1_servercert_pem_rsa.pem
1_serverkey_pem_rsa.pem
src
vrpcfg.zip
web.zip
logfile
snmpnotilog.txt
security
lam
304,292 KB total (300,782 KB free)
Step 2 Configure an SSL policy and load the digital certificate.
# Create a sub-directory named security and copy the digital certificate to this sub-directory.
<HTTP-Server> mkdir security/
<HTTP-Server> copy 1_servercert_pem_rsa.pem
<HTTP-Server> copy 1_serverkey_pem_rsa.pem security/
After the preceding configurations are complete, run the dir command in the security subdirectory on the HTTP server. The command output shows that the digital certificate has been
successfully uploaded to the server.
<HTTP-Server> cd security/
<HTTP-Server> dir
Directory of flash:/security/
Idx
1
2
Attr
-rw-rw-
Size(Byte)
1,302
951
Date
Time(LMT)
Apr 13 2011 14:29:31
Apr 13 2011 14:29:49
FileName
1_servercert_pem_rsa.pem
1_serverkey_pem_rsa.pem
304,292 KB total (303,404 KB free)
# Create an SSL policy and load the PEM digital certificate.
<HTTP-Server> system-view
[HTTP-Server] ssl policy http_server
[HTTP-Server-ssl-policy-http_server] certificate load pem-cert
1_servercert_pem_rsa.pem key-pair rsa key-file 1_serverkey_pem_rsa.pem auth-code
123456
[HTTP-Server-ssl-policy-http_server] quit
After the preceding configurations are complete, run the display ssl policy command on the
HTTP server. The command output shows detailed information about the loaded certificate.
[HTTP-Server] display ssl policy
SSL Policy Name: http_server
Policy Applicants: WEB secure-server
Key-pair Type: RSA
Certificate File Type: PEM
Certificate Type: certificate
Certificate Filename: 1_servercert_pem_rsa.pem
Key-file Filename: 1_serverkey_pem_rsa.pem
Auth-code: 123456
MAC:
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
224
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
11 SSL Configuration
CRL File:
Trusted-CA File:
Step 3 Load the Web page file.
[HTTP-Server] http server load web.zip
Step 4 Create a Web account.
# Enable the HTTPS server function.
NOTE
Before enabling the HTTPS server function, disable the HTTP server function.
[HTTP-Server] undo http server enable
[HTTP-Server] http secure-server ssl-policy http_server
[HTTP-Server] http secure-server enable
# Configure authentication information and authorization mode for HTTP users.
[HTTP-Server] aaa
[HTTP-Server-aaa] local-user http password simple http
[HTTP-Server-aaa] local-user http service-type http
[HTTP-Server-aaa] quit
Step 5 Log in to the Web system.
Open the Web browser on the PC. Enter the IP address of the HTTP server in the address bar.
Press Enter and the dialog box shown in Figure 11-14 is displayed.
Figure 11-14 Login GUI
Enter the HTTP user name, password, and verification code. Click Login or press Enter to enter
the Web system.
Step 6 Verify the configuration.
# Run the display http server command on the HTTPS server. The command output shows the
SSL policy name and the HTTPS server status.
[HTTP-Server] display http-server
HTTP Server Status
HTTP Server Port
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
: disabled
: 80(80)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
225
Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration
HTTP Timeout Interval
Current Online Users
Maximum Users Allowed
HTTP Secure-server Status
HTTP Secure-server Port
HTTP SSL Policy
11 SSL Configuration
:
:
:
:
:
:
20
0
5
enabled
443(443)
http_server
----End
Configuration Files
Configuration file of the HTTPS server
#
sysname FTP-Server
#
FTP server enable
#
undo http server enable
http server load web.zip
http secure-server ssl-policy http_server
http secure-server enable
#
vlan batch 10
#
ssl policy http_server
certificate load pem-cert 1_servercert_pem_rsa.pem key-pair rsa key-file
1_serverkey_pem_rsa.pem auth-code 123456
#
aaa
authentication-scheme default
authorization-scheme default
accounting-scheme default
local-user http password simple http
local-user http service-type http
local-user huawei password simple huawei
local-user huawei service-type ftp
local-user huawei ftp-directory flash:
#
interface Vlanif10
ip address 192.168.0.1 255.255.255.0
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port link-type access
port default vlan 10
#
return
Issue 01 (2011-07-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
226